EP2574379A2 - Front device - Google Patents
Front device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- EP2574379A2 EP2574379A2 EP12405102A EP12405102A EP2574379A2 EP 2574379 A2 EP2574379 A2 EP 2574379A2 EP 12405102 A EP12405102 A EP 12405102A EP 12405102 A EP12405102 A EP 12405102A EP 2574379 A2 EP2574379 A2 EP 2574379A2
- Authority
- EP
- European Patent Office
- Prior art keywords
- levers
- ski
- positive control
- control
- lever
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Granted
Links
- 239000013641 positive control Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 383
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 claims description 188
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 claims description 103
- 230000027455 binding Effects 0.000 claims description 50
- 238000009739 binding Methods 0.000 claims description 50
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 54
- 238000007373 indentation Methods 0.000 description 21
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 18
- 229910000831 Steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 11
- 239000010959 steel Substances 0.000 description 11
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 11
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 7
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000009194 climbing Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000012216 screening Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000008602 contraction Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000001174 ascending effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000013270 controlled release Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009472 formulation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000035939 shock Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000007480 spreading Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003892 spreading Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000004809 Teflon Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920006362 TeflonĀ® Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000881 depressing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000994 depressogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000035515 penetration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000036316 preload Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63C—SKATES; SKIS; ROLLER SKATES; DESIGN OR LAYOUT OF COURTS, RINKS OR THE LIKE
- A63C9/00—Ski bindings
- A63C9/22—Arrangements for adjusting the toe-clamps
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63C—SKATES; SKIS; ROLLER SKATES; DESIGN OR LAYOUT OF COURTS, RINKS OR THE LIKE
- A63C9/00—Ski bindings
- A63C9/08—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings
- A63C9/0807—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings for both towing and downhill skiing
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63C—SKATES; SKIS; ROLLER SKATES; DESIGN OR LAYOUT OF COURTS, RINKS OR THE LIKE
- A63C9/00—Ski bindings
- A63C9/08—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings
- A63C9/085—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings with sole hold-downs, e.g. swingable
- A63C9/08507—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings with sole hold-downs, e.g. swingable with a plurality of mobile jaws
- A63C9/08528—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings with sole hold-downs, e.g. swingable with a plurality of mobile jaws pivoting about a longitudinal axis
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63C—SKATES; SKIS; ROLLER SKATES; DESIGN OR LAYOUT OF COURTS, RINKS OR THE LIKE
- A63C9/00—Ski bindings
- A63C9/08—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings
- A63C9/085—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings with sole hold-downs, e.g. swingable
- A63C9/08557—Details of the release mechanism
- A63C9/08564—Details of the release mechanism using cam or slide surface
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63C—SKATES; SKIS; ROLLER SKATES; DESIGN OR LAYOUT OF COURTS, RINKS OR THE LIKE
- A63C9/00—Ski bindings
- A63C9/08—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings
- A63C9/085—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings with sole hold-downs, e.g. swingable
- A63C9/08557—Details of the release mechanism
- A63C9/08571—Details of the release mechanism using axis and lever
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A63—SPORTS; GAMES; AMUSEMENTS
- A63C—SKATES; SKIS; ROLLER SKATES; DESIGN OR LAYOUT OF COURTS, RINKS OR THE LIKE
- A63C9/00—Ski bindings
- A63C9/08—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings
- A63C9/086—Ski bindings yieldable or self-releasing in the event of an accident, i.e. safety bindings using parts which are fixed on the shoe of the user and are releasable from the ski binding
Definitions
- the invention relates to a front automatic for a ski binding, in particular a touring ski binding.
- This front-mounted machine comprises two levers which are arranged laterally in the longitudinal direction of the ski and each have a holding means for holding a ski boot in a toe region of the ski boot.
- the two levers are each mounted such pivotable about an axis that the holding means are moved in a pivotal movement of the lever about these axes in a Skiquerides.
- the front automatic machine has a release position, in which the two holding means are at a first distance from each other.
- it has a holding position, in which the two holding means are at a second distance from each other, which is smaller than the first distance.
- ski bindings are subdivided into piste bindings, which are used only for downhill skiing and downhill skiing, and touring bindings, which are also used for walking on skis, in particular for ascending with the help of climbing skins attached to the skis. While the former only have to ensure a reliable fixation of the ski boot on the ski in a so-called downhill position, the latter must be brought to ascend additionally from the downhill to a climbing position in which the ski boot is pivotable about an axis in Skiquerides pivotally in the heel area of the ski to allow for joint movement between the ski boot and the ski to go.
- Touring ski bindings can be divided into two types.
- One type comprises a ski boot carrier which can be pivoted relative to the ski and to which the ski boot is held by binding jaws.
- a representative member of this type of touring ski bindings is, for example, in EP 0 754 079 B1 (Fritschi AG).
- the second type of touring ski bindings does not include such a ski boot carrier.
- the ski boot is pivotally mounted in a toe area on the sole in a ski-mounted front automat.
- the automatic heel unit is also fixedly mounted in a distance from the front automaton on the ski adapted to a ski boot sole length and locks the shoe in the heel area in the downhill position.
- ski boots In the ascent position, the heel of the heel is released from the heel counter, so that the heel of the heel can be lifted off the ski and swiveled around the bearing on the front automat.
- suitable ski boots this typically have in the toe area two lateral recesses for pivotal mounting in the front vending machine.
- recesses which are open at the rear are formed on the shoe sole into which holding means of the heel unit can engage.
- ski boots on a stiff or only slightly bendable sole. In the latter case, the ski boots can be formed bendable, for example, in the ball area of the foot.
- ski longitudinal direction means along the orientation of the longitudinal axis of the ski.
- skiparallel means aligned for an elongate object along the longitudinal axis of the ski.
- ski-parallel means aligned parallel to the sliding surface of the ski.
- ski direction means a direction transverse to the ski longitudinal direction, which, however, need not be oriented exactly at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the ski. Their orientation may also be slightly different from a right angle.
- ski center means a center of the ski in the ski direction
- ski manifest does not mean that it can move in relation to the ski.
- ski refers to the reference system of (fictitious) skis.
- front, ārearā, ātopā, ābottomā and āsideā refer to āfrontā, ārearā, ātopā, ābottomā and āsideā of the ski.
- horizontal and vertical refer to the ski, with āhorizontalā lying in a ski-parallel plane and āverticalā oriented perpendicular to this plane.
- a touring ski binding of the above introduced second type is in the EP 0 199 098 A2 (Bartel) and is sold under the trademark Dynafit.
- the binding front part of this system comprises two angle levers, which are arranged opposite each other in the cross-machine direction and each are pivotally mounted about an axis extending in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the two angle levers each have an upwardly directed and a sideways aligned arm, which are arranged at right angles to each other.
- the upwardly oriented arms each comprise a truncated conical or hemispherical pin pointing towards the center of the ski, which can engage in recesses provided in the toe area of a ski boot.
- the laterally oriented arms of the angle lever point like the pin towards the center of the ski, but are in operative connection with each other via a spring device. Since the two angle levers are spring-loaded by the spring means on the laterally aligned arms, they can by overcoming a dead center, in which the two sideways arms are aligned in a linear extension to each other, down and snap upwards. When the sideward arms are snapped down, the upwardly directed arms are pivoted together. On the other hand, when the sideways-aligned arms are snapped upwards, the upwardly directed arms are swung apart. Accordingly, the pins for holding a ski boot in the first case are closer to each other and in the second case further apart.
- this position of the binding front part is a holding position.
- the holding means are sufficiently far apart so that the ski boot is released. Accordingly, this position of the binding front part is a release position.
- the ski boot can be detached from the ski binding system even without actuating the opening lever.
- the ski boot is first released from the heel counter and then from the binding front part. If it is a frontal fall, the ski boot is released from the heel unit up and tilted forward in the binding front. If the forward or upward force on the ski boot is sufficiently large, the ski boot is also torn out of the binding front part by overcoming the force acting on the two angle levers. If, on the other hand, it is a lateral fall, the ski boot is released laterally by the heel counter and around a toe area of the ski boot Vertical axis turned. In this case, the ski boot is rotationally released from the binding front part, by overcoming the force acting on the angle lever force.
- Both the binding front part according to the EP 0 199 098 A2 (Bartel ) as well as the binding front part according to WO 2009/121 187 A1 (G3 Genuine Guide Gear Inc.) have the disadvantage that tripping occurs uncontrollably.
- the two angle levers When triggered, the two angle levers are pressed apart by an acting force on the ski (or torque) in undefined manner, whereby the ski boot is released from the binding front part.
- front automat which in the WO 2007/010392 A2 (Ski Trab SRL) is traced.
- this front automaton also comprises two angle levers, each comprising two arms arranged substantially at right angles to each other.
- First arms of this angle lever also each include a center of the ski facing, truncated cone or hemispherical pin designed to hold a ski boot.
- second arms of this angle lever are also aligned laterally to the ski center pointing each other.
- the two angle levers are pivotally mounted about vertical axes, with the axes in front of the Toe area of the ski boot are arranged.
- the second arms of the angle lever are not in direct operative connection, but each engage with their end in a lateral recess of a pivot lever aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- This pivot lever is displaceable in the longitudinal direction of the ski, wherein the ends of the second arms of the two angle levers are carried in the side incisions. Accordingly, the two angle levers are pivoted to each other or apart during a displacement of the pivot lever, whereby a transfer of the front vending machine is achieved by the release position in the holding position and back.
- the pivot lever In addition to the displaceability in the ski longitudinal direction of the pivot lever is pivotally mounted about a vertical axis on the front vending machine, but it is pressed by two springs in a ski-parallel alignment. In a force acting laterally on the ski boot, therefore, the outer of the two angle levers can be pushed outwards by the pivot lever is pivoted slightly laterally against the spring force, until the angle lever is released from the lateral incision in the pivot lever. At the same time the inner angle lever is pivoted by the pivoting movement of the pivot lever following the outer angle lever slightly inward.
- the front automatic according to the WO 2007/010392 A2 (Ski Trab SRL) a lateral release, in which the storage of the ski boot is first loosened, and as soon as the outer bell crank is released, is fully released. Furthermore, the front automatic allows a frontal release, which is just as uncontrolled as in the binding front parts according to the EP 0 199 098 A2 (Bartel ) and the WO 2009/121187 A1 (G3 Genuine Guide Gear Inc.).
- the object of the invention is to provide a front of the above-mentioned technical area belonging to the front, which increases the safety of a skier.
- the front automatic transmission comprises a positive control, on which the two levers are mounted in the arresting position, so that the two levers can be moved coupled in a skiquer direction within a dynamic range and the two retaining means are coupled at a second distance to each other on a dynamic path in the transverse direction become.
- the coupled movement of the two levers along the dynamic range may be pivotal movement of the two levers about the axes.
- the coupled movement of the two levers along the dynamic range may, for example, also be a linear movement along a linear path, which corresponds to a translatory movement of the two levers, in which the two levers are displaced in a coupled manner in the transverse direction.
- the coupled movement of the two levers along the dynamic range can also be a linear movement along a linear path, which is a combination a translational movement and a pivoting movement of the two levers corresponds, in which the two levers are coupled shifted in Skiquerides and pivoted about the axes.
- the dynamic range may be limited on one or both sides by a stop, by which at least one of the two levers is stopped and prevented in its further freedom of movement.
- a stop by which at least one of the two levers is stopped and prevented in its further freedom of movement.
- the dynamic range on one or both sides is limited by the fact that the two levers are no longer coupled from a certain position, but can be moved decoupled.
- the dynamic range for one of the levers is limited by a stop and for the other, the lever is limited by the fact that it is decoupled from a certain position.
- the type of limitation for the two levers can also be dependent on the side of the dynamic range.
- the dynamic range on a first side for a first of the two levers is limited by a stop and is limited for a second of the two levers in that it can be decoupled from a certain position.
- the dynamic range on a second side for the first lever may be limited by being decoupled from a certain position, while the dynamic range on the second side is limited by a stop for the second lever.
- the solution has the advantage that a ski boot held in the front automat can be moved together with the two holding means in the arresting position on the dynamic path in the ski direction. This movement can be absorbed by the front automate energy without the ski boot is released from the front vending machine. This is advantageous when skiing and possibly in a fall, since blows to the ski or the ski boot may arise in which the ski boot should not detach from the front automat.
- the energy that can be absorbed by the front automat can be predetermined by adjusting the length of the dynamic path and / or a resistance force which has to be applied for the movement. Accordingly, a controlled Safety release are triggered, which is triggered when the energy of a shock should exceed the recordable energy.
- the two levers are coupled within the dynamic range coupled in Skiquerides about the axes in the locking position. This has the advantage that the movement of the two levers is guided by the axes.
- the two levers are coupled within the dynamic range in a direction of movement along a linear path.
- This may be, for example, a translational movement of the two levers, in which the two levers are moved in a coupled manner in the transverse direction.
- the movement of the two levers along the linear path may, for example, also be a combination of a translational movement and a pivotal movement of the two levers, in which the two levers are coupled in the transverse direction and pivoted about the axes.
- This has the advantage that a course of the dynamic path of the holding means can be designed such that forces which act from different directions on a ski boot held in the front automatic machine can be optimally absorbed by the front automatic machine.
- the front automatic machine for a ski binding comprises two levers arranged laterally in the ski longitudinal direction, each with a holding means for holding a ski boot in a toe region of the ski boot.
- the two levers are preferably each pivotally mounted about an axis and the holding means are moved by the levers in a pivoting movement in a Skiquerides
- the front automaton preferably comprises a designated as a positive control element and the two levers on this positive control and on another element of the Front automats are storable.
- the front automatic machine preferably has a release position in which the two holding means are at a first distance from one another.
- the front automatic machine preferably has a holding position in which the two holding means are at a second distance from each other, which is smaller than the first distance.
- the two levers are movably mounted on the positive control in the holding position, which is also movable in the holding position.
- the two levers are preferably coupled by the movable positive control within a dynamic range coupled in Skiquerides, the two holding means are coupled coupled at a second distance to each other on a dynamic path in Skiquerraum be moved.
- the forced control is moved is not specified. It may, for example, be a linear movement or a pivoting or rotating movement.
- the front automatic machine for a ski binding comprises two levers arranged laterally in the longitudinal direction of the ski, each having a retaining means for holding a ski boot in a toe region of the ski boot.
- the two levers are preferably each pivotally mounted about an axis and the holding means are moved by the levers in a pivoting movement in a Skiquerides
- the front automaton preferably comprises a designated as a positive control element and the axes are mounted on this positive control.
- the front automatic machine preferably has a release position in which the two holding means are at a first distance from one another.
- the front automatic machine preferably has a holding position in which the two holding means are at a second distance from each other, which is smaller than the first distance.
- the two levers are mounted on the positive control, which is movable in the holding position.
- the two levers are preferably movable in the transverse direction, coupled by the movable positive control within a dynamic range, wherein the two holding means are coupled and moved at a second distance from each other on a dynamic path in the transverse direction.
- How the forced control is moved is not specified. It may, for example, be a linear movement or a pivoting or rotating movement.
- preferred embodiments of the front automatic machine can also be configured differently.
- it will be shown on the basis of advantageous features how such other preferred embodiments can be formed.
- the two above-mentioned, preferred embodiments may include one or more of these advantageous features.
- the axes of the levers are arranged in a plane parallel to the ski. This has the advantage that the axes can be arranged below the holding means, whereby a compact design of the front automatic is achieved.
- the axes are preferably oriented essentially in the same direction as a ski, although deviations from a parallel alignment of 10 degrees or 20 degrees may be provided. Preferably, however, the lateral deviation of the axes from a ski-parallel alignment is less than 10 degrees. If the levers are pivotable within the dynamic range and, accordingly, the dynamic path of the holding means lies in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the respective lever, thereby aligning a plane of the dynamic paths of the holding means substantially in the cross-machine direction.
- the two levers are coupled in the same direction along a linear path within the dynamic range, alignment of the axes with pivotal movement of the lever about the axes can continue the movement of the holding means in the transverse direction.
- this arrangement of the axes is advantageous in the event that the front panel provides a lateral safety release.
- a movement of the ski boot essentially runs in a plane parallel to the ski.
- the movement of the ski boot may include both a linear movement and a rotation about a vertical axis of the ski boot.
- the dynamic path of the holding means can best accommodate movements of the ski boot, which are caused by differently oriented, in Skiquerraum forces.
- the energy that can be absorbed by the front-end automaton can be predefined in the best possible manner for different forces.
- a controlled, lateral safety release can be made possible, which occurs when the absorbable energy is exceeded.
- the axes are aligned differently.
- they can also be aligned vertically or at any angle to the ski longitudinal direction.
- both levers each comprise a control jaw for interacting with a ski boot on a side facing the center of the ski.
- these control jaws may each be an element attached to the corresponding lever and projecting towards the center of the ski.
- the control jaws have the advantage that at a pivoting movement of the two levers from a certain pivot angle, the control jaw lying in the direction of movement lever can interact with the ski boot and thereby the holding means of this lever can be released from the ski boot. Accordingly, this has the advantage that the process of a lateral safety release from the front automate can be simplified.
- the movement of the ski boot becomes more continuous in the event of a lateral safety release, thus increasing the safety for the skier.
- the levers are pivotable about the axes within the dynamic range, the control jaws can already interact with the ski boot in the event of a pivotal movement of the levers within the dynamic range.
- the two levers are movable within the dynamic range along a linear path and, for example, at least one of the two levers is pivotable about the corresponding axis in the event of a lateral safety release, then the corresponding control jaw can cooperate with the ski boot during the safety release, making the ski boot simpler can be solved from the front automat.
- control jaws are not formed as a separate element. You can, for example, each be made in one piece with the corresponding lever, or the levers can also be shaped so that, for example, an arc in the lever takes over the function of a control jaw.
- the levers include a sterberbackigartigen bow, which is also under the term Steuerbacke.
- the two levers can also not comprise a control jaw arranged on the side of the levers directed to the center of the ski.
- the holding means are designed to be easily detached from the ski boot when the levers are pivoted beyond a certain angle, this alternative may be advantageous since this simplifies the construction of the front automat and makes its manufacture more cost effective.
- the positive control is movable in the holding position along a positive control path, whereby the two levers are coupled within the dynamic range movable. If the two levers are movable within the dynamic range along a linear path, the two levers are preferably fixedly mounted on the positive control in the detent position, whereby the two levers are coupled coupled within the dynamic range. If, however, the two levers are pivotable about the axes within the dynamic range, the positive control in the detent position is preferably movable in a coupled pivotal movement of the two levers within the dynamic range of the two levers along a positive control path. How the forced control is exactly moved in these two cases is not predetermined.
- Its movement may be, for example, a movement in a linear direction, a pivotal or rotational movement, or a combination thereof. If the movement of the positive control is a rotary or pivoting movement, the forced control path can thus be a rotation angle. If, on the other hand, the movement is a combination of a linear direction and a pivoting or rotating movement, then the forced-control path can be a combination of a rotation angle and a linear path. In the case of such a combination, for example, there is also the possibility that the priority control is moved as a whole in a combined movement. However, for example, there is also the possibility that one or more elements of the positive control are moved in a linear direction while one or more further elements of the positive control are rotated or pivoted. All such movements of the positive control along the positive control path have the advantage that in the holding position in a simple manner a coupled Pivoting movement of the two levers along the dynamic range can be achieved.
- the movement of the positive control is a movement in a linear direction, a pivotal movement or a combination thereof, then the movement and thus also the positive control path are preferably aligned in the cross-machine direction. This has the advantage that the positive control can join the coupled pivoting movement of the two levers, whereby the construction of the front automatic is simplified.
- the positive control in the holding position is not movable, but is arranged skifest.
- the positive control is movable in the holding position, it is preferably pressed by a biased, elastic element with a force to the center of the positive control travel at a deviation from a center of the positive control travel.
- a biased, elastic element with a force to the center of the positive control travel at a deviation from a center of the positive control travel.
- more than one prestressed, elastic element is present. Regardless of the number of elastic elements, this has the advantage that the constraint control is moved by the one or more elastic members to the center of the positive control travel when no other force is applied to the positive control. It can be moved with the positive control and the two levers in a center of the dynamic range.
- the two levers can be moved along the dynamic range in both first and second directions under the influence of an incipient lateral force starting from this center of the dynamic range, moving back to the center of the dynamic range when the lateral force ceases become.
- the corresponding energy can be absorbed by the front automat without disengaging the ski boot, regardless of which side the impact or force comes from.
- the mentioned center of the positive control path and the mentioned center of the dynamic range may be the geometric center of the Force control path or dynamic range. However, it can also be a position in the positive control path or dynamic range, which does not lie in the geometric center. There is a possibility that these centers are in a continuous range of the constraint path or dynamic range. In this case, the centers are given by the fact that the positive control or the lever are pressed by the one or more elastic elements to this point in the positive control path or in the dynamic range. But there is also the possibility that the centers are in a kink in the positive control path or dynamic range.
- the positive control path may be V-shaped and the center of the positive control path may be in the top of the "v".
- the positive control may be moved from the center of the positive control path, depending on the direction of the lateral force or the lateral stroke, along one or along the other arm of the "v".
- the center of the force control path may also be at one end of the force control path. This may be the case in particular when the positive control path runs along the ski longitudinal direction.
- the positive control can then be movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski starting from this end of the positive control travel, but in this example the two levers are mounted in the holding position on the positive control in such a way that they are pivotable in the effective direction of the lateral force or the lateral impact, while the positive control is moved independently of the effective direction of the lateral force in the ski longitudinal direction.
- both levers can not be pressed into the middle of the dynamic range by one or more prestressed, elastic elements.
- both levers can each be pressed into the middle of the dynamic range separately by one or more prestressed elastic elements.
- a corresponding embodiment may be particularly advantageous if the positive control itself is arranged skifest.
- the prestressed elastic element is preferably in the ski center in the ski longitudinal direction aligned.
- the prestressed, elastic element in the longitudinal direction of the ski presses on the positive control by pressing a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston into a horizontally arranged, substantially V-shaped indentation in the positive control.
- the movable in the Skiquerides positive control can be maintained in the middle of the positive control travel by the piston is pressed into a tip of the v-shaped indentation.
- the positive control can be moved from the center of the positive control travel along the positive control travel, wherein the piston is pressed by the corresponding edge of the substantially v-shaped recess in the longitudinal direction of the ski against the biased force of the elastic member.
- the force acting on the flanks of the substantially V-shaped indentations, directed in the longitudinal direction of the ski force of the elastic element causes a restoring force, which drives the positive control respectively back into the middle of the positive control travel.
- the piston may have at its tip a roller bearing which can roll on the flanks of the substantially V-shaped indentation in the positive control.
- the piston has no roller bearing, but that the piston and / or the substantially V-shaped indentation in the positive control have a special coating which reduces the frictional resistance.
- the piston has at its tip a roller bearing which can roll on a special coating of the substantially V-shaped indentation in the positive control.
- the piston does not include such a roller bearing and that neither the piston nor the substantially V-shaped indentation in the positive control have a special coating.
- the biased elastic element in the longitudinal direction of the forced control by a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston against a laterally guided and thereby not laterally displaceable pivoting element presses, so that a first foot of the pivoting element in a substantially v-shaped Indentation in the forced control is pressed.
- the pivoting element may for example comprise a second and third foot, which are each arranged on one side of the ski center on the pivoting element and aligned towards the piston.
- the skid-movable positive control may be maintained in the center of the positive control path by supporting the second and third legs of the pivot member on a front side of the piston and pressing the first leg of the pivot member into a vertex of the substantially v-shaped recess , Accordingly, the priority control can be moved from the center of the force control path along the force control path.
- the first foot of the pivoting element which is pressed into the substantially V-shaped indentation, moved along. If the pivoting element between its three feet is pivotally mounted about a pivot axis, so the pivoting element is thereby pivoted, so that depending on the pivoting direction, only the second or the third foot of the pivoting element is supported on the piston.
- the piston As the corresponding foot is moved towards the center of the ski, the piston is moved against the bias of the prestressed elastic element. At the same time, the force with which the piston is pressed against the pivoting element pushes the pivoting element back into its central orientation, in which the second and the third foot of the pivoting element are supported on the front side of the piston. Accordingly, the forced control is thereby driven back to the middle of the positive control path.
- the pivoting element or the pivot axis of the pivoting element is mounted displaceably in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- a prestressed, elastic element is present and aligned in the ski center in the ski longitudinal direction, then presses in a third preferred variant, the biased elastic element in the longitudinal direction of the positive control by a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston against a pivoting element of the Forced control presses.
- the piston can be pressed into a tip of a horizontally arranged, substantially v-shaped indentation in the pivoting element, whereby the pivotable element is aligned substantially in the longitudinal direction of the ski and the movable in Skiquerraum Forced control is maintained in the middle of the forced control path.
- the positive control can be moved from the center of the positive control travel along the positive control travel by pivoting the pivotable member in the corresponding direction.
- the pivotable member together with the pivotable element and the v-shaped recess is pivoted, whereby one of the two flanks of the V-shaped recess is pressed against the piston, which is thereby moved against the directed in the ski longitudinal direction of the elastic force.
- the force acting on the flanks of the substantially V-shaped indentation, directed in the longitudinal direction of the ski force of the elastic element causes a restoring force, which drives the positive control in each case back into the middle of the positive control travel.
- the piston has, for example, at its front end a separate pivotable element which is pressed against the pivotable element of the positive control.
- the pivotable element of the positive control can thereby also be aligned substantially in the longitudinal direction of the ski, and the skid-steerable positive control be kept in the middle of the forced-control path.
- the forcing control can also be moved from the center of the positive control path along the positive control path by pivoting the pivotable member in the corresponding direction.
- the separate pivotable element is pivoted at the front end of the piston and the piston is moved against the force of the elastic element. This causes a restoring force, which drives the positive control respectively back to the middle of the positive control path.
- a prestressed, elastic element is present and aligned in the ski center in the ski longitudinal direction, then presses in a fourth preferred variant, the biased elastic element in the longitudinal direction of the forced control by a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston against at least one pivotally mounted Lever presses, which in turn is pressed against a pivotable element of the positive control.
- the Possibility that, for example, two pivotally mounted levers are present, which are arranged side by side in such a way seen in the cross-machine direction, that the pivotable element is aligned substantially in the longitudinal direction and the Skiquerraum movable positive control is held in the middle of the positive control travel.
- the two pivotally mounted levers can be arranged with their pivot axes, for example, in such a way that a force of the piston translated is transmitted to the pivotable element of the positive control.
- the two pivotally mounted levers are arranged with their pivot axes such that a force of the piston is underpinned transmitted to the pivotable element of the positive control.
- the positive control can be moved starting from the middle of the positive control travel along the positive control travel by pivoting the pivotable element in the corresponding direction. If only one pivotally mounted lever is present, then this lever can be pivoted and the piston can be pressed by the lever against the restoring force.
- the prestressed, elastic element is aligned in the ski center in the ski longitudinal direction, then there is, in addition to these four preferred variants, also the possibility that the prestressed elastic element interacts differently with the positive control.
- the prestressed, elastic element is not aligned in the ski center in the ski longitudinal direction.
- it may be aligned along the positive control path or along the dynamic range.
- it is different and through his Preload exerts a force on a deflection mechanism, which deflects the action of the force in a direction along the forced control path or along the dynamic range.
- the front-mounted machine preferably has a safety release position.
- the two levers in the holding position are advantageously movable to one end of the dynamic range, where that of the two levers, which includes the holding means, which is moved away on the dynamic path from the ski center, releasable by the positive control and the other of the two lever pivoted away is, whereby the front panel of the holding position in the safety release position can be brought.
- This has the advantage that a lateral safety release is made possible.
- the two levers are each supported by a first link guide and a first sliding block mounted therein on the positive control. Furthermore, at least one of the two levers is preferably released in the safety release position by releasing the corresponding first sliding block from the corresponding first positive control.
- the first slide guides at least in the holding position, enclose and guide the respective first slide block on both sides. But there is also the possibility that the first slide guides do not surround the respective first sliding block on both sides and lead, but only on one side or only on one area both sides and otherwise lead unilaterally. This means lead unilaterally that, for example, the respective first sliding block touches the corresponding first slide guide only on one side.
- the first slide guides may be a surface on which the respective first slide block is supported and along which the respective first slide block is movable.
- the first sliding blocks can be pressed, for example by means of an elastic element against the respective first slotted guide.
- the formulation is used here, according to which a first sliding block is guided in the corresponding first slotted guide.
- the first sliding blocks can be designed in various ways. For example, they may be cylindrical. But they can also be cylindrical, for example, and each have a role enclosing them, by which their storage in the corresponding first slide guide is improved.
- first two sliding blocks are for example block-shaped.
- first two sliding blocks comprise differently shaped areas.
- they can each have a cylindrical area and one or more further areas.
- the cylindrical area or another area of the respective first slide block may interact with the first slide guide.
- both levers in the holding position and in the safety release position are each supported by a first sliding guide and a first sliding block mounted therein on the positive control.
- both the first slotted guides and the first sliding blocks can be designed in many different ways, as already described.
- the two levers but also not be supported by a first link guide and a bearing therein first sliding block on the positive control.
- the axes of the levers may be mounted on the positive control, while the levers are mounted on a further element of the front automatic machine by a first slotted guide and a first sliding block mounted therein.
- the levers can be stored both in the holding position and in the safety release position or only in the holding position on the other element.
- levers can also be mounted differently than by first slide guides and first sliding blocks on the positive control or on the further element.
- Such storage may be formed for example by a movable lever or piston connection.
- first slide guides and first sliding blocks are present and if the first sliding blocks are stored in the retaining position in the corresponding first slide guide, the first slide guides preferably have a geometry, so that in the safety release position that of the two levers, which includes the holding means on the dynamic path is moved away from the ski center, is pivotal.
- the corresponding lever can be pivoted in the safety release position with a movement of the corresponding first sliding block in the corresponding first link guide or released from the corresponding first link guide.
- the corresponding first sliding block can be pivoted in the safety release position in the corresponding first slotted guide, this has the advantage that the two levers are mounted on the positive control or on the further element of the positive control both in the holding position and in the safety release position and thus a Return of the front automatic from the safety release position is facilitated in the holding position. If, however, the corresponding first sliding block in the safety release position of the This has the advantage that in the holding position, the two levers are mounted on the positive control or on the further element of the positive control and that in the safety release position that of the two levers, which includes that holding means, on the dynamic path of the ski center is moved away, is freely pivotable.
- first slotted guides are present and have such a geometry that the first sliding blocks are mounted in the locking position and in the safety release position in the corresponding first slotted guide
- the first slotted guides are preferably widened in a region in which the corresponding first sliding block in the safety release position is movable in the corresponding first slide guide when the corresponding lever is pivoted. This has the advantage that the one of the two levers, which is pivotable in the safety release position, is easier to move, since the corresponding first sliding block is loosely guided in this area of the corresponding first sliding guide and therefore between the corresponding first sliding block and the corresponding first sliding guide there is no or very little frictional resistance.
- the first slide guides also preferably have a corner in shape around which the corresponding first sliding block is moved when the corresponding lever is released during a transition from the holding position to the safety release position. This has the advantage that the lever is released immediately in a safety release and thus the transition from the holding position to the safety release position is carried out quickly.
- the first slide guides on a geometry, so that in the safety release position that of the two levers, which includes the holding means which is moved on the dynamic path to the ski center, is fixed.
- This can be achieved, for example, in that the corresponding first sliding block abuts at one end of the corresponding first sliding guide. But this can also be be achieved in that the corresponding lever is guided in such a way by the first link guide that it abuts on another stop and is thereby prevented from further movement.
- the positive control in the holding position along a positive control travel is movable, but this can also be achieved, for example, that in the safety release position further movement of the positive control is blocked, whereby a further movement of the corresponding lever is prevented.
- the further movement of the forced control can be done for example by a stop.
- These three variants have the advantage that in the safety release position a free movement of that of the two levers, which comprises the holding means which is moved on the dynamic path to the center of the ski, is prevented. As a result, a controlled release of the ski boot can be achieved with a lateral safety release.
- the first slide guides have a geometry, so that in the safety release position that of the two levers, which comprises the holding means which is moved on the dynamic path to the ski center, is pivotable within a limited range, while the other lever is freely pivotable. Also, a controlled release of the ski boot can be achieved with a lateral safety release.
- the two levers in the safety release position but also coupled by the geometry of the first link guides be pivotable, but that of the two levers, which includes the holding means which is moved away on the dynamic path from the ski center, proportionally more pivotal than the other Lever is.
- the positive control is preferably arranged in the safety release position. If the positive control is movable in the holding position along the forced control path, the positive control can be prevented, for example, by an attack on a further movement beyond one end of the positive control travel. But there is also the possibility that one of the two levers in the safety release position is prevented by a stop on a further movement and by its storage on the forced control to the forced control hinders further movement. If the two levers are mounted by a first link guide and a first sliding block on the positive control or on the further element of the front vending machine, but can also be achieved by a geometry of the first slide control that the positive control is arranged in the safety release position skifest.
- the positive control in the safety release position but also be mobile.
- the positive control is movable in the holding position and the front automatic comprises a biased in the ski center in the ski longitudinal direction
- biased elastic element and the positive control has a substantially V-shaped recess, so are advantageously in outer regions of the two flanks of the V-shaped recess Arranged hollows.
- a roller bearing arranged at the tip of a piston acted upon by the prestressed elastic element with a force can interact with one of these hollows when the positive control is in the safety release position.
- a first foot of a pivoting element can thereby interact with one of these troughs when the positive control is in the safety release position.
- the troughs have the advantage that the restoring force, which acts on the positive control by the piston or by the pivoting element and drives it to a center of the positive control travel, is minimized or completely eliminated in the safety release position. It does not matter if the positive control is arranged in the safety release position or is movable. However, by minimizing or eliminating the restoring force, the troughs can aid in the most preclusive control of the positive control in the safety release position.
- the positive control comprises a pivotable element, in which the substantially V-shaped recess is arranged, this can be achieved, for example, by a corresponding cooperation of the pivotable element with the remaining positive control.
- the two levers are mounted in the release position on the positive control, so that the holding means of the two levers are at the first distance from each other. This has the advantage that the two levers and thus the distance of the two holding means in the release position can be controlled by the positive control.
- the two levers may also be released from the positive control in the release position. But both levers should be stored at a transfer of the front vending machine from the release position in the holding position in each case on the positive control, in this transfer, the distance between the two holding means should be reduced from the first distance to the second distance.
- This can be implemented, for example, in that the two levers are mounted in the release position on a variable spacer. When transferring from the release position to the retaining position, the distance between the two retaining means can be reduced to the second distance and the two levers can be stored on the positive control by this variable spacer. The levers can be loosened from the variable spacer or remain supported on the variable spacer.
- the two levers When the front panel returns from the detention position vice versa, the two levers should be released from the positive control and the distance between the two holding means should be extended by the variable spacer to the first distance. If the two levers in the holding position are not mounted on the variable spacer, they should first be able to be stored on the variable spacer.
- This alternative has the advantage that the distance between the two Garmittein is not changed by the forced control, whereby the positive control can be stably constructed and can withstand correspondingly larger forces.
- the positive control comprises a control element on which the two levers are mounted, wherein the control element is movable such that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means are at the first distance from each other and that the two levers move together in the arresting position are and the holding means are at the second distance to each other.
- the control element is movable such that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means are at the first distance from each other and that the two levers move together in the arresting position are and the holding means are at the second distance to each other.
- the positive control comprises a control element, wherein the two levers are moved together by the control element in a transfer to the holding position and the holding means are at a second distance from each other.
- the two levers are movable relative to each other by a further element of the front system such that the two levers are moved apart and the holding means are at the first distance from each other.
- this has the advantage that the transfer of the front vending machine from the release position to the holding position by the forced control is reached while the transfer of the front automaton of the Locking position in the release position by an independent of the positive control element takes place.
- the positive control comprises a control and if the two levers are each supported by a first link guide and a first sliding block mounted therein on the positive control, the two levers are advantageously each supported by the first link guide and the first sliding block mounted therein on the control.
- the two levers are not ever supported by the first link guide and the first sliding block mounted therein on the control.
- the positive control comprises two elements instead of the control element, one of the two levers being mounted on a first element and the other of the two levers being mounted on a second element, and the first and the second element being movable relative to one another in this way, that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means are at the first distance from each other and that the two levers are moved together in the holding position and the holding means are at the second distance from each other.
- This can be implemented, for example, in that the two elements of the positive control are connected to one another by a piston connection or by a screw connection.
- the two elements can also be connected to each other, for example, by a pivoting connection, wherein the holding means are moved apart or moved together by a pivoting movement of the two elements.
- the positive control instead of the two elements comprises the above-mentioned control.
- the positive control comprises, in addition to the two elements, the control as a third element, wherein the third element, the first and the second element are relatively movable relative to each other, that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means in the first Are spaced apart and that the two levers are moved together in the holding position and the holding means are at the second distance from each other.
- the positive control comprises, in addition to the two elements, the control as a third element, wherein the third element, the first and the second element are relatively movable relative to each other, that the two levers are moved together in a transfer to the holding position and the holding means are at the second distance from each other.
- the first and the second element by a further element of the front system are movable relative to each other so that the two levers are moved apart and the holding means are at the first distance from each other.
- the positive control comprises a third element, which fulfills a function other than the control, or that the positive control comprises no third element.
- the positive control comprises a control element without the two elements mentioned above or in addition to the two elements mentioned above, a control element as the third element and if the forced control is deviated from a center of the positive control path by a prestressed elastic element having a force to the center of the positive control path can be pressed, so regardless of the aforementioned preferred variants, the control is preferably designed such that the restoring force, which drives the positive control in the middle of the positive control travel, via this control on the positive control is transferable.
- the control fulfills several functions and thus the front-end can be constructed of fewer elements, allowing for a lighter construction.
- the positive control comprises a control element without the two elements mentioned above, or in addition to the two elements mentioned above, a control element as the third element, this control element is pivotable in a preferred variant.
- This has the advantage that during a movement of the positive control away from the middle of the positive control path, a pivoting movement of the control can be caused, whereby at a certain pivot angle of the control a lateral safety release can be triggered by the control.
- the control of the positive control for example, both pivotally mounted on another element of the positive control and pivotally mounted on the rest of the front automat.
- the two bearings allow both a pivoting movement and a translational movement of the control relative to the other element of the positive control or the remaining front-end automata.
- control element in order to enable a lateral safety release, can, for example, be designed such that at a certain angle in its pivoting movement it moves or releases the first, the second or both the first and the second element in such a way that one or both levers are released and can thus be moved apart.
- the positive control comprises only the control element, but not the two above-mentioned elements
- the control element can however also be designed such that it releases one or both levers in its pivoting movement at a certain angle, whereby the two levers are activated in the event of a lateral safety release can be swung apart.
- control element is not designed to be pivotable.
- control element may, for example, be designed to be rotatable or movable along a linear path.
- this linear path can be formed in the longitudinal direction of the ski, in the direction of the ski, at an angle to these two directions, or curved.
- the positive control comprises two or more elements
- the positive control comprises only the control element or else only a differently configured element.
- the positive control comprises at least three elements, ie in addition to the two elements mentioned above, a control element as a third element
- the first element and the second element of the positive control are preferably each supported by a second link control and a second sliding block on the third element of the positive control. Accordingly, the first and second members can be moved relative to each other by moving the third member relative to the first and second members, respectively.
- This has the advantage that an operation of the positive control is possible in a simple and cost-effective manner.
- the second slide guides enclose and guide the respective second sliding block on both sides. But there is also the possibility that the second slide guides do not enclose and guide the respective second sliding block on both sides, but only lead on one side or only on one area on both sides and otherwise on one side.
- the second slide guides may be a surface on which the respective second slide block is supported and along which the respective second slide block is movable.
- the second sliding blocks can be pressed for example by means of an elastic element against the respective second slotted guide. Accordingly, regardless of whether the second slotted guides surround the second sliding blocks on both sides or only on one side, the formulation is used, according to which a second sliding block is guided in the corresponding second slotted guide.
- the second sliding blocks can be designed in various ways. For example, they may be cylindrical.
- the two second sliding blocks are for example block-shaped.
- the two second sliding blocks comprise differently shaped areas. For example, they can each have a cylindrical area and one or more further areas. In this case, for example, depending on the area of the second slide guide, the cylindrical area or another area of the respective second slide block may interact with the second slide guide.
- the first element of the positive control comprises, for example, a rack which is guided in the second element and in that the third element of the positive control is a pinion, by means of which the first and the second element of the positive control are movable relative to one another are.
- the positive control comprises at least three elements.
- the control or third element of the positive control is preferably movable along the ski longitudinal axis, wherein upon movement of the third element of the positive control in a first direction, the first and the second element of the positive control are moved together by the second slotted guides and at Movement of the third element of the positive control in a second direction, the first and the second element of the positive control by the second slide guides are moved apart. It can be seen in the first and second direction in the longitudinal direction of the ski in the forward or backward direction or vice versa.
- the control or third element of the positive control can not be moved along the ski longitudinal axis, but can also be designed to be rotatable about a rotation axis.
- the first and the second element of the positive control can be moved together by the second slotted guides, for example during a rotation of the third element of the positive control in a first direction and the first and second rotation of the third element of the forced control in a second direction the second element of the positive control are moved apart by the second link guides.
- the second slide guides can be arranged spirally around the axis of rotation in the third element of the positive control or else in the first or second element of the positive control.
- the third element of the positive control is designed to be rotatable about the axis of rotation, then a bearing of the first and the second element on the third element can also not be formed via the second slide guides.
- the first element and the second element of the positive control can each be mounted by a rotary joint on the third element of the positive control, wherein upon rotation of the third element of the positive control in a first direction of rotation, the first and the second element of the positive control are moved together and at a Movement of the third element of the positive control in a second direction of rotation, the first and the second element of the positive control are moved apart.
- the positive control is movable in the detention position along the positive control travel, it preferably comprises a carriage, which is designed to be movable along the positive control travel.
- the positive control in addition to the already mentioned control or the already mentioned two elements comprises such a carriage.
- the positive control comprises such a carriage, which simultaneously fulfills the function of the already mentioned first, second or third element or control element and thus at the same time corresponds to the corresponding first, second or third element or control element.
- more than one of the first, second and third element or control element is designed as a carriage.
- the positive control comprises such a carriage and none of the above-mentioned elements.
- the positive control consists only of such a slide or even includes other elements.
- the further elements of the positive control are preferably mounted on the carriage.
- the further elements may be movable, for example, together with the carriage in the transverse direction.
- the positive control comprises, for example, a pivotable element
- this pivotable element can be mounted both on the carriage and on the remaining front automatic machine and be pivotable in the case of a movement of the carriage in the transverse direction.
- the control element can be designed as a pivotable element and can be mounted correspondingly both on the carriage and on the rest of the front automatic machine and be pivotable in the case of a movement of the carriage in the transverse direction.
- the positive control does not include such a carriage.
- the positive control comprises such a carriage, so advantageously the two axes are mounted on the carriage.
- the levers may be additionally mounted on another element of the positive control. But there is also the possibility that the two levers are not additionally stored on another element of the positive control, but otherwise on the front vending machine. Both have the advantage that in the holding position, the two levers can be moved together with the carriage.
- axles are not mounted on the carriage, but on another element of the positive control or the front automatic.
- the front automatic machine in a blocking position, in which the two holding means are at a third distance from each other, which is equal to or smaller than the second distance and in which the two levers are blocked in their movement.
- This has the advantage that the front automat can be blocked if a ski boot is held in the front automat, whereby it can be prevented that the ski boot can inadvertently free itself from the front automat. If a touring ski binding system with the front automatic machine is in the ascent position, the blocking position can thus prevent an unintentional loss of the ski. This could otherwise occur, for example, when the skis are lowered when making a sharp bend in a steep slope due to a lateral impact on the ski.
- the front automatic machine instead of a blocking position, has a damper position in which the two holding means are at a third distance from each other, which is equal to or smaller than the second distance and in which the two levers higher resistance than in the holding position within the dynamic range are movable.
- This has the advantage that the front automat can indeed enable a lateral safety release when a ski boot is held in the front vending machine, but at the same time a movement of the holding means can be damped along with the ski boot held in the front vending machine along the dynamic path and reduced accordingly.
- a touring ski binding system with the front automatic machine is in the ascent position, a movement of a ski boot held in the front automatic machine can be damped in the ski direction relative to the ski by the damper position and reduced accordingly.
- This has the advantage that for a skier when climbing the slip resistance is increased, while maintaining the safety of the skier by the possibility of a lateral safety release is guaranteed.
- the front-end machine is used by a skilled skier, who wishes and / or requires a lateral safety release only with large side forces.
- the ski boot can be sufficiently retained even in the hold position by the front vending machine, whereby no blocking or damper position is needed. Accordingly, in this case, by dispensing with the blocking position and the damper position of the front automatic constructively simpler and correspondingly lighter.
- the front-end automatic machine has a blocking position
- the positive control can be blocked in the blocking position.
- the positive control is blockable in its movement, if it is movable in the holding position.
- the positive control is arranged in the holding position skifest, this means that the bearings of the two levers on the positive control in the blocking position can be blocked.
- the blocking of the positive control has the advantage that by blocking a single element, a movement of the two levers can be prevented. Accordingly, the front-end machine can be constructed more simply and manufactured more cost-effectively.
- the positive control can be blocked by a blocking element.
- one or more blocking elements can be mounted on the positive control and can be pushed or pivoted for blocking into corresponding openings in the front automatic machine. But there is also the possibility that one or more blocking elements are mounted on the front automata and can be pushed or pivoted to block the positive control in corresponding openings in the positive control.
- the front panel comprises a control lever, which can be brought into a release position and in a retaining position, wherein the front automatic by positioning the control lever in the release position in the release position and by Positioning of the control lever in the holding position in the holding position can be brought.
- the control lever may be both a pivotable lever and a displaceable lever. Both have the advantage that the front panel can be easily controlled from the release position in the holding position and brought back.
- the front automatic machine comprises two control levers, wherein the front automatic machine can be brought from the release position into the holding position by a first of these two control levers and can be brought from the holding position into the release position by a second of these two control levers.
- the front panel comprises a control lever, by which it can be brought only from the holding position in the release position.
- the front automat can for example comprise a tread spur, by which it can be brought from the release position into the retaining position, said tread spur can be actuated by a ski boot when the ski boot is properly positioned for entry into the front vending machine to the holding means.
- this tread spur can also be provided in addition to the one or the two control lever, which allow the transfer of the front vending machine from the holding position to the release position and back.
- the control lever is preferably brought into a blocking position, wherein the front automatic can be brought by blocking the control lever in the blocking position in the blocking position.
- the front automat comprises at least one control lever and has a damper position
- the control lever can preferably be brought into a damper position, whereby the front automat can be brought into the damper position by positioning the control lever in the damper position.
- the front-mounted machine comprises, for example, a separate control lever, by which the front-end machine can be brought into the blocking position or damper position, or else that the front-engine does not comprise any control lever by which the front-end machine can be brought into the blocking position or damper position ,
- the control lever preferably comprises at least one blocking element, by means of which the positive control in the blocking position can be blocked by positioning the control lever in the blocking position. If the positive control is movable in the holding position, this can be done, for example, by the blocking element or locking elements each engaging in a recess in the positive control when the control lever is brought into the blocking position. But there is also the possibility that the control lever has two or more blocking elements which surround a portion of the positive control or the entire positive control side and thereby prevent the positive control of their movement.
- control lever may for example comprise two or more blocking elements which, when the control lever is in the blocking position, engage the bearings of the two levers on the positive control and thereby the positive control and movement of the Block the lever.
- the control lever preferably comprises at least one damper element, by which a movement of the two levers in the damper position can be assigned a movement resistance by positioning the control lever in the damper position.
- the positive control can be moved in the holding position, this can be done, for example, by virtue of the fact that the one or more damper elements interact with the positive control and thereby increase the resistance of a movement of the positive control.
- the control lever may for example also include one or more damper elements, which interact with the levers or the axles to increase the resistance of the two levers.
- the positive control is movable along the positive control travel and comprises a carriage which is movable along the positive control travel
- the front automatic comprises at least one control lever with at least one damper element and has a damper position
- the occupancy of a movement of the two levers takes place in a preferred variant a resistance to movement by the damper element cooperates with the carriage.
- the positive control but includes a control it can be occupied as a preferred variant, the occupancy of a movement of the two levers with a resistance to movement by the damper element cooperates with the control.
- the increase in the resistance of a movement of the two levers can also take place in a different manner.
- the positive control can be moved along the positive control travel and comprises a carriage which is movable along the positive control travel and if the front automatic machine comprises at least one control lever with at least one blocking element and has a blocking position, in a preferred variant the positive control is blocked by the blocking element engages in a recess in the carriage.
- the blocking of the forced control can also be done differently.
- the positive control for example, not only be blocked by at least one blocking element of the control lever, but in addition also differently or else be blockable differently by at least one blocking element of the control lever.
- the constraint includes a control, it may be blockable by, for example, blocking the control.
- the control of the positive control for example, in the ski longitudinal direction in a lateral guide to be movable, but the control can not be designed to be fully movable in the lateral guide, to prevent it sufficiently to move in a different direction than along the ski longitudinal direction and accordingly to To block.
- the control of the positive control in the longitudinal direction of the ski can be designed to be movable out of the lateral guide, whereby it can be released for movement in a direction other than along the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the lateral guide used in this example for blocking need not be a guide which completely surrounds the control laterally. It may also be a rail-like guide on which the control can be pushed.
- the movement of the control element blocked by the lateral guide should be that movement which can be performed by the forced control in the arresting position. It may thus be both a linear movement in the direction of the cross-section and a turning or pivoting movement.
- the control element can be moved by the control lever in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the front automatic machine comprising a guide element in which the control element of the positive control is mounted.
- the control can be pressed together with the guide element by a biased with an elastic element piston against the control lever and thereby be displaced according to the positioning of the control lever in the ski longitudinal direction.
- this has the advantage that the guide element is indeed pressed against the control lever, but does not necessarily have to follow the control lever.
- This has the advantage over a direct bearing of the guide element on the control lever that, for example, the control lever can be brought from the blocking position into the retaining position, whereby the guide element is moved against the prestressed piston. But if the control lever is brought from the retaining position to the blocking position, the control lever can be brought into the blocking position without movement of the guide member. For example, if the guide member is prevented from being displaced by the biased piston by an obstacle, the guide member may also be only be moved by the preloaded piston when the obstacle is removed.
- control lever can also be brought from the retaining position to the blocking position, whereby the guide element is moved against the prestressed piston. If in this variant, however, the control lever is brought from the blocking position to the holding position, the control lever can be brought into the holding position without movement of the guide member. Depending on the design of the front automaton, this can be advantageous.
- control lever can also be mounted directly on the guide element, or else the front automatic machine can not comprise any guide element. In this last case, for example, the positive control of the preloaded piston can be pressed against the control lever and / or the positive control can also be mounted directly on the control lever.
- the holding means are pins which are arranged on the respective lever so that they point starting from the respective lever with a free end to the ski center.
- pins In a first preferred variant of the pins have pointed free ends. This has the advantage that the ski boot, which should be held in the front automatic, can be mounted precisely pivotable about the horizontally oriented in Skiquerides axis in the front vending machine.
- the pins have rounded free ends. This has the advantage that the ski boot can easily be detached from the front automat by a side safety release.
- the pins have tapering regions towards their free ends, the free ends of the pins being rounded. This has the advantage that by a suitable choice of the size of the tapered areas and the size of the rounded ends of the pins an optimization between precisely pivotable mounting of the ski to the horizontally oriented in the ski direction axis and good solubility of the ski boot from the front vending machine at a side Safety release can be achieved.
- the front automatic machine comprises a housing which can be fastened to a ski and a hold-down element which can be fastened to the ski.
- the housing is preferably fastened in its front region on a ski, while it is movably mounted in the rear region by the hold-down element in the ski longitudinal direction, wherein the housing can be held by the attached to the ski hold-down element in its rear region on the ski.
- the housing can be fastened in its rear region on a ski while it is movably supported in its front region by the hold-down element in the longitudinal direction of the ski, the housing being held on the ski by the hold-down element fastened to the ski in its front region can.
- the front-end machine can also be fastened to a ski in a different manner.
- the front-mounted machine can comprise a housing which can be fastened firmly to the ski, wherein the front-mounted machine comprises a separate hold-down element. This has the advantage, for example, that the front-end machine can be made simpler and therefore less expensive.
- FIGS. 1a, 1 Bund 1c each show an oblique view of a front automatic machine 1 according to the invention
- FIG. 1a is the front panel 1 in a release position, in FIG. 1b in a detention position and in Figure 1c shown in a blocking position.
- Figure 1a, 1b and 1c is the front panel 1 from obliquely down right aligned diagonally above left. If the front automatic 1 is mounted on a ski (not shown), corresponds in these figures below right at the back of the ski, while top left at the ski corresponds to the front. Therefore, in these figures, the ski longitudinal direction runs along an axis from bottom right to top left. Next corresponds in the Figures 1a, 1b and 1c above and below also the front automaton 1 above and below.
- the front automatic machine 1 comprises a housing 2, a control lever 3 and a tread spur 4 made of plastic. Further, the front automatic 1 comprises two pivoting levers 5.1, 5.2 made of aluminum, each with a retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 made of steel. The two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are laterally, in the direction of the ski opposite each other, arranged. They are each pivotally mounted about an axis 9.1, 9.2 (see FIG. 3 ). These two axes 9.1, 9.2 are each arranged in a lower region of the front automatic machine 1 and are aligned in a plane lying parallel to the ski at an angle of 6 degrees to the longitudinal direction of the ski (FIG FIG. 10 ).
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivotable substantially in the cross-machine direction.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are mounted on a positive control 20.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 above this storage depending on a pointing to the ski center side a control jaw 8.1, 8.2.
- the two holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 are arranged facing the ski center.
- a ski boot can be supported by the holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 between the two pivoting levers 5.1, 5.2.
- the ski boot to be stored should have for this purpose in a toe area laterally mounted bearing bushes in which the retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 can intervene (see FIG. 2 ).
- the tread spur 4 In front of the two pivoting levers 5.1, 5.2, the tread spur 4 is pivotably mounted about a transverse axis 7 aligned horizontally in the transverse direction of the ski in a ski center. A free end of the tread spur 4 extends above the positive control 20 to the rear between the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2.
- the tread spur 4 In the release position ( FIG. 1a ), the tread spur 4 is slightly pivoted upwards, so that its free end is arranged above the housing 2.
- the arrest position FIG. 1b
- the blocking position (1c) In the arrest position ( FIG. 1c), however, its free end is folded down and is located on the housing. 2
- the front automatic transmission 1 can be transferred further into the blocking position by the control lever 3 being pulled further from the detention position into the blocking position.
- the control lever 3 can be pressed down.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are slightly swung apart and the two holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 are at a first distance from each other ( FIG. 1a ).
- This first distance is sufficiently large so that a toe area of an upright ski boot can be moved between the two holding spurs 6.1, 6.2.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are slightly pivoted toward each other ( FIG. 1b ). Accordingly, here are the holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 at a second distance from each other, which is smaller than the first distance.
- the second distance is dimensioned such that the two retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 can simultaneously engage from opposite sides in laterally mounted bearing bushes in the toe area of a ski boot and thereby store the ski boot.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are also slightly pivoted toward each other.
- the two holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 at a third distance from each other, which is equal to or smaller than the second distance. Accordingly, a ski boot can also be stored in the blocking position by lateral engagement of the two holding spurs 6.1, 6.2.
- the ski boot In order to achieve a transfer of the front vending machine 1 from the release position to the holding position in which a ski boot is stored in the front vending machine 1, the ski boot can be positioned in an upright, parallel alignment with its toe area between the two pivoting levers 5.1, 5.2 and gently moved downwards , Here, the tread spur 4 is pressed by a sole of the ski boot down, causing the front panel 1 is transferred to the holding position.
- the control lever 3 is also pivoted up into the retaining position. In this transfer of the front automatic 1 from the release position to the holding position of the control lever 3 can also be simultaneously lifted manually from the release position to the holding position.
- the housing 2 has a guide bar 14, which extends in the cross-machine direction from a first side to a second side of the housing 2.
- This guide bar 14 is slightly raised relative to the rest of the housing 2 and serves to prevent a ski boot from being completely parked on the housing 2. In the case of a lateral safety release, it also serves to support a movement of the ski boot in the lateral direction and to prevent a sole of the ski boot can catch the rest of the housing 2.
- the guide bar 14 may have in its upper region a sliding element on which the sole of the ski boot can slide.
- a sliding element may for example be made of Teflon.
- FIG. 2 shows a schematic oblique view of the front vending machine 1 in the holding position with a mounted in the front vending machine 1 ski boot 100.
- the ski boot 100 has in its toe area two bearing bushes 101.1, 101.2, in which the two retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 engage.
- the ski boot 100 is mounted on the front automatic machine 1 so as to be pivotable about a horizontal axis oriented in the direction of the ski.
- FIG. 3 shows an exploded view of the front vending machine 1.
- the perspective of the presentation is the same as in the Figures 1a, 1b and 1c , In the exploded view, however, other components of the front automatic 1 are recognizable, which in the Figures 1a, 1b and 1c as well as in the FIG. 2 are covered by the housing 2.
- the front panel 1 comprises a flat, made of metal base plate 30 which closes the otherwise downwardly open housing 2 against the bottom.
- the bottom plate 30 has four vertically aligned openings 31.1, 31.2, 31.3, 31.4 in a substantially square arrangement.
- a piston 35 made of plastic is arranged in a rear region of the housing 2 in the center of the ski.
- This piston 35 is aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski. In an upper region, it has a guide aligned in its longitudinal direction, which can engage in a corresponding counterpart in the housing 2. As a result, the piston 35 is guided in the longitudinal direction of the ski. In its rear region, the piston 35 has an opening into which a spiral spring 36 oriented in the longitudinal direction of the ski is inserted.
- This coil spring 36 abuts with its rear end against a locking nut 37, which is screwed with a thread on an aligned in the longitudinal direction of adjustment screw 38.
- a head of the adjusting screw 38 is mounted in an opening 39 in a rearwardly directed side wall of the housing 2.
- the adjusting screw 38 is rotatable from the outside through the opening 39.
- a guide element 50 made of plastic is mounted in the housing 2.
- This guide element 50 has in each case a rearwardly facing arm in a rear region on both sides.
- the piston 35 is gripped on both sides of these arms from the front.
- the guide member 50 in a front region on both sides each have a forward facing, short arm.
- These two arms each comprise an upwardly pointing nubs 51.1, 51.2 in a front region.
- Towards the rear, these two arms are delimited from a central region 53 of the guide element 50 by a plate oriented vertically and in the direction of the ski, forming a front stop 52.
- This central region 53 is plate-shaped and oriented horizontally.
- the positive control 20 is movably mounted in the cross-machine direction. In this case, it is guided between the front stop 52 and the rear stop and accordingly prevented from moving in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the guide element 50.
- the positive control 20 comprises two side levers 20.1, 20.2 and a control plate 20.3.
- the latter is, as described above, movably mounted in the guide element 50 in the transverse direction.
- the mounting of the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 on the control plate 20.3 each consist of a second slide guide 21.1, 21.2 in the control plate 20.3 with a second sliding block 22.1, 22.2 mounted therein, which is attached to the corresponding side lever 20.1, 20.2.
- the second slotted guides 21.1, 21.2 are aligned such that they allow a relative movement of the control plate 20.3 to the side levers 20.1, 20.2 in the ski longitudinal direction, whereby the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 are pulled together or pushed apart.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are mounted.
- the side levers 20.1, 20.2 each comprise a first slotted guide 23.1, 23.2, in each of which a first sliding block 24.1, 24.2 arranged on the corresponding pivoting lever 5.1, 5.2 is mounted.
- the first sliding blocks 24.1, 24.2 are arranged on the respective pivot lever 5.1, 5.2 above the axles 9.1, 9.2, about which the pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are mounted pivotably on the housing 2.
- control plate 20.3 In addition to the second slotted guides 21.1, 21.2, the control plate 20.3 two incisions 27.1, 27.2, which are arranged side by side on a forward-facing side of the control plate 20.3. In this two incisions 27.1, 27.2 can be attached to the control lever 3 attached bars 28.1, 28.2. As a result, the control plate 20.3 can be prevented in the blocking position from moving in the transverse direction.
- the coil spring 36 In the mounted state of the front automatic machine 1, the coil spring 36 is biased between the piston 35 and the lock nut 37. To the rear, it is supported on the locking nut 37 and the adjusting screw 38 on an inner side of the housing 2. By turning the Adjusting screw 38, whereby the lock nut 37 is moved forward or backward, while the bias of the coil spring 36 can be adjusted. Accordingly, the coil spring 36 pushes the piston 35 with an adjustable force to the front, where the piston 35 is supported against the control plate 20.3.
- the piston 35 has a laterally rounded, front end with a horizontal slot. In this slot, a round steel disk 40 is aligned horizontally and rotatably supported about a vertical axis 41.
- FIG. 4a shows three different views of the front vending machine 1 in the release position.
- FIG. 4a the front panel 1 is shown from below, wherein the bottom plate 30 and the guide member 50 (see FIG. 3 ) are hidden.
- FIG. 4b shows a vertical, running along the ski center longitudinal section through the front vending machine 1 and
- Figure 4c shows a vertical cross-section through the positive control 20 seen from the front.
- the control plate 20.3 relative to the two side levers 20.1 20.2 moved backwards, causing the second sliding blocks 22.1, 22.2 are located at a front end of the second slotted guides 21.1, 21.2. Since the second slotted guides 21.1, 21.2 in the control plate 20.3 diverge from back to front, the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 are thereby moved apart. Accordingly, the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are swung apart. Since the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 are not displaceably mounted in the housing 2 in the longitudinal direction of the ski, but only in the transverse direction, the control plate 20.3 in the housing 2 is displaced to the rear in a rearward position. Accordingly, the piston 35 is pressed against the coil spring 36 to the rear.
- FIG. 4b shows that the control lever 3 is in the release position and that the tread spur 4 is pivoted upwards.
- the tread spur 4 extends in its front region in the control lever 3 and has an upwardly pointing shoulder 10, which adjusts with its rear edge against a downwardly facing counterpart 11 of the control lever 3. Therefore, the control lever 3 is pivoted up when the tread spur 4 is pressed down or the tread spur 4 is pivoted up when the control lever 3 is pivoted down to the release position.
- control plate 20.3 is guided in the guide member 50 and that the piston 35 presses from behind with the steel plate 40 against the control plate 20.3 forward.
- the control plate 20.3 is held in its rear position by the guide element 50 abuts with the front stop 52 forward against a arranged on the control lever 3 screening 12 (see also FIG. 6d ).
- FIGS. 5a, 5b and 5c show the same views of the front vending machine 1 as the Figures 4a, 4b and 4c , Unlike the Figures 4a, 4b and 4c is the front panel 1 in the Figures 5a, 5b and 5c but in the detention position.
- FIG. 5a It can be seen that the control plate 20.3 and the piston 35 in the holding position slightly forward than in the release position (see FIG. 4a ) are located. Accordingly, the second sliding blocks 22.1, 22.2 are located in a central region of the second slide guides 21.1, 21.2. Since the second slotted guides 21.1, 21.2 diverge from back to front, thereby the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 are slightly contracted compared to the release position. Therefore, the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivoted together.
- FIG. 5b shows that the tread spur 4 is pivoted down about the transverse axis 7 and rests on the housing 2.
- the control lever 3 is slightly swung up and is in the holding position.
- the piston 35 and the control plate 20.3 are slightly shifted forward.
- the guide element 50 hidden.
- FIG. 5c In cross section ( FIG. 5c ) It can be seen how the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivoted together, whereby the two holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 are at a second distance from each other.
- the first sliding blocks 24.1, 24.2 At the upper ends of the first slide guides 23.1, 23.2.
- the two Side lever 20.1, 20.2 contracted. Accordingly, the axes are 9.1, 9.2, by which the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivotally mounted on the housing 2, slightly further out in the incisions 26.1, 26.2 of the two side levers 20.1, 20.2.
- FIGS 6a, 6b and 6c show the same views of the front vending machine 1 as the Figures 4a, 4b and 4c or 5a, 5b and 5c.
- the front panel 1 is in the blocking position.
- FIG. 6d shows similar to the FIG. 6b a vertical longitudinal section through the front vending machine 1 in the blocking position.
- the vertical longitudinal section does not run along the center of the ski, but is slightly offset from the center of the ski to the side. It passes through one of the two forwardly extending arms of the guide element 50 and through the arranged on this arm nubs 51.2.
- the screening 12 can be seen, which is arranged on the control lever 3 in a region below the transverse axis 7. With this screening 12, the control lever 3 presses on the two knobs 51.2 of the forwardly facing arms of the guide element 50. The further the control lever 3 is pulled in the blocking position up, the farther the grid 12 is pulled over the nubs 51.2 of the guide member 50.
- the guide element 50 and the control plate 20.3 mounted therein are also pulled forwards in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the second sliding blocks 22.1, 22.2 are contracted by the second slide guides 21.1, 21.2, the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 and the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 with the holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 further contracted (see FIG. 6a ). Therefore, in the blocking position are the Holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 at a third distance from each other, which is equal to or smaller than the second distance. How big the third distance is effective depends on the ski boot, which is stored in the front automatic 1.
- the two holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 contracted in the blocking position by pulling up the control lever 3 until they are present in the lateral bearing bushes of the ski boot.
- the pivot lever 5.1, 5.2 By this queuing is about the pivot lever 5.1, 5.2 and the positive control 20 prevents further pulling up of the control lever 3.
- How far the control lever 3 in the blocking position is combinziehbar thus depends on the width of the ski boot, or from the distance of the lateral bushings in the toe area of the ski boot.
- the forwardly extending arms of the guide member 50 may have a grid, which extends substantially semicircularly forwardly upwards, wherein the radius of curvature decreases towards the top.
- this modification can be arranged per knob on the control lever 3 per side in the region below the transverse axis 7 each. With these nubs, the control lever 3 can press on the two grids of the forward facing arms of the guide member 50. The farther the control lever 3 is pulled upwards in the blocking position, the farther the nubs are pulled over the latches of the guide element 50.
- the guide element 50 and the control plate 20.3 mounted therein are pulled forwards in the longitudinal direction of the ski by virtue of the upwardly tapered radius of curvature of the rasters.
- the two swivel levers 5.1, 5.2 can be pulled together with the holding spurs 6.1, 6.2.
- FIGS. 7a, 7b and 7c show each seen from the front a vertical, running through the positive control 20 cross section through the front vending machine 1 and a schematic section through a lower portion of the ski boot 100.
- the sequence of figures illustrates a lateral safety release of the front vending machine 1.
- the ski boot 100 in the Representation to the right from the front panel 1 solved. When viewed in the ski forward direction, the movement of the ski boot 100 indeed runs to the left.
- the terms "rightā and āleftā refer to the illustration shown.
- FIG. 7a is the front panel 1 in the hold position.
- the representation corresponds to that in FIG. 5c
- the additional schematic representation of the ski boot 100 shows how the ski boot 100 is mounted in the front vending machine 1.
- a lower region of the sole of the ski boot 100 almost touches the control jaws 8.1, 8.2 of the two pivoting levers 5.1, 5.2.
- the force control 20 consisting of the control plate 20.3 and the two lateral levers 20.1, 20.2 is located in the center of the front automatic machine 1 in the center of the ski.
- the positive control 20 can be moved in the locked position in the locking position.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivoted to the right, the two holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 are moved together with the ski boot 100 to almost to one end of a dynamic path.
- the lower region of the sole of the ski boot 100 on the right touches the control jaw 8.1 of the corresponding pivoting lever 5.1.
- the holding spur 6.1 of this pivot lever 5.1 is just released from the corresponding bearing bush 101.1 of the ski boot 100. Accordingly, the retaining spores 6.1 can not dig into the bushing 101.1 of the ski boot 100 and can not prevent a solution of the ski boot 100 from the front automatic machine 1 by getting caught with the sole of the ski boot 100.
- the positive control 20 is moved to the right to the end of the positive control travel and the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivoted to the right to one end of the dynamic range, so are the first two sliding blocks 24.1, 24.2 in the bend of the first slide guides 23.1, 23.2.
- the first sliding block 24.2 of the left pivot lever 5.2 abuts against the first slide guide 23.2 of the corresponding side lever 20.2 and thus prevents the positive control 20 from moving further to the right.
- the positive control 20 is moved so far to the right that the first sliding block 24.1 of the right pivot lever 5.1 from the kink in the first slide guide 23.1 is released and can move freely in the arcuate portion of the first slide guide 23.1 of the corresponding side lever 20.1.
- the right-hand pivot lever 5.1 can tilt freely downwards, as a result of which the front automatic machine 1 is in a safety release position ( FIG. 7c ).
- the ski boot 100 is released from the front vending machine 1 and released.
- the Figures 8a, 8b and 8c illustrate how already the Figures 7a, 7b and 7c a lateral safety release of the front automatic 1.
- the front automatic 1 is in the representations in each case in the same positions as in the representations of Figures 7a, 7b and 7c ,
- the Figures 8a, 8b and 8c However, show the front automatic 1 each from below, the bottom plate 30 and the guide member 50 (see FIG. 3 ) are hidden.
- FIG. 8a equals to FIG. 5a , It shows the 20 consisting of the control plate 20.3 and the two side levers 20.1, 20.2 Priority 20 skimittig centered in the front vending machine 1.
- Die FIG. 8b shows the positive control 20 in a position near the end of the positive control path. Accordingly, the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivoted almost to the end of the dynamic range.
- FIG. 8c shows the positive control 20 at the end of the forced control path.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivoted to the end of the dynamic range, wherein the pivot lever 5.1, which is in the pivoting direction, released by the positive control 20 and tilted down.
- the control plate 20.3 has a laterally flattened indentation 25. Since the control plate 20.3 in the Figures 8b and 8c is moved away laterally from its skimittigen position, the piston 35 is pressed by the corresponding edge of the recess 25 in the control plate 20.3 out of the recess 25 against the bias of the coil spring 36 to the rear. Due to the obliquely oriented to the spring force edge of the recess 25 while a restoring force is exerted on the control plate 20.3, which drives the control plate 20.3 back to its skimittige position.
- the front automatic 1 not only allows a lateral safety release, but also a forward release.
- This Frontalauswhat can take place when the front panel 1 is in the hold position or in the blocking position.
- FIG. 9 a vertical longitudinal section through the front vending machine 1 in the blocking position.
- a ski boot 100 is stored in the front vending machine 1.
- One heel of the ski boot 100 is free, whereby the ski boot 100 with the heel is pivotally upwards.
- the ski boot 100 is shown tilted forward accordingly, with a toe portion 102 of the ski boot 100 touches the control lever 3.
- the ski boot 100 may continue to move forward than in the FIG. 9 shown tilted forward. If the front panel 1 as in FIG.
- the control lever 3 is depressed by the toe portion 102 of the ski boot 100 from the blocking position to the holding position in such a fall, whereby the front automatic transmission 1 is transferred from the blocking position to the holding position. If now the ski boot is tilted even further forward, the control lever 3 is pushed even further down.
- the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivoted apart and the ski boot 100 is released from the front vending machine 1.
- the control lever 3 does not have to be pressed completely from the retaining position into the release position and the front automatic 1 does not have to be completely transferred to the release position. It is sufficient if the ski boot 100 presses the control lever 3, starting from the holding position slightly down and the two pivot levers 5.1, 5.2 are slightly swung apart.
- the front automatic 1 can be used in a touring ski binding system together with an automatic heel unit (not shown).
- the automatic heel unit should allow storage of the ski boot 100 in a heel area.
- a downhill position in which the front-end automatic machine 1 is in the holding position and in which the ski boot 100 is mounted in the toe area in the front automatic machine 1 and in the heel area on the automatic heel unit.
- a ski binding system allows a climbing position in which the ski boot 100 is mounted in the front automatic 1 and released by the heel machine. In this ascent position, the front automatic 1 can be in the holding position or in the blocking position. It allows in both positions, a pivoting movement of the ski boot 100 to a Skiquerachse and accordingly allows a walking motion of a skier.
- the front panel 1 allows in the holding position a lateral safety release.
- the towing ski binding system thereby enables a lateral safety release.
- the ski boot 100 is supported on the heel counter by rearward-facing retaining spurs, the ski boot 100 can pivot in such a lateral safety release. He is only solved laterally from the front vending machine 1, while he is still held by the holding spurs of the heel unit. As soon as the ski boot 100 has been detached from the front automatic machine 1, it can also be detached from the heel counter by being moved away from the holding spurs of the heel counter and / or turned away. Accordingly, a lateral safety release option is unnecessary by the heel counter. It is sufficient if the automatic heel unit allows a safety release in the forward direction.
- the front automatic 1 is optimized for a lateral safety release in a touring ski binding system, in which the heel machine does not allow lateral safety release.
- This optimization is in the FIG. 10 which shows a view of the front automatic machine 1 in the holding position with the ski boot 100 held therein, illustrated. So are in the FIG. 10 shown two dashed lines along which the axes 9.1, 9.2 (see FIG. 3 ) about which the two pivoting levers 5.1, 5.2 are pivotable, are aligned. These two straight lines 15.1, 15.2 run backwards at an angle of 6 degrees to the longitudinal axis of the ski and intersect at a point 16 in the heel area of the ski boot 100.
- the ski boot 100 Since the automatic heel unit does not permit a lateral safety release, the ski boot 100 becomes a vertical axis during a lateral safety release rotated in the vicinity of the point 16 until it is released from the front panel 1. As a result, the pivotal movement of the pivot lever 5.1, 5.2 lying in the direction of movement runs perpendicular to the direction of movement of the ski boot 100. Accordingly, the alignment of the axles 9.1, 9.2 is optimized for a rotational movement of the ski boot 100 in the event of a lateral safety release.
- FIGS. 8a and 8b show the Figures 11a and 11b the front automatic 1 in the holding position or in a position in which the positive control 20 is located at the end of the forced control path.
- the front panel 1 is shown from below, with the bottom plate 30 and the guide member 50 are hidden.
- FIG. 11c again shows the front vending machine 1 in the holding position from below, the bottom plate 30 is hidden while the guide member 50 is shown.
- the first difference is that the piston 35 is guided by a nub in an aligned in the ski longitudinal direction cut in the guide element 50 (see FIG. 11c ). Since the piston 35 is guided in accordance with the top and bottom in the ski longitudinal direction, results for the piston 35 better guidance in the ski longitudinal direction, so that a better Power transmission from the piston 35 is achieved on the control plate 20.3, whereby friction losses are minimized.
- the second difference is that the laterally flattened recess 25 laterally each have a trough 42.1, 42.2, in which the steel plate 40 of the piston 35 can engage when the front automatic 1 in the safety release position (see Figures 11a and 11b ) is located.
- the restoring force acting on the control plate 20.3 can be minimized or completely eliminated.
- the Wegschenken the corresponding pivot lever 5.1 is facilitated, since by the minimized or canceled repulsive force, a frictional resistance for the pivotal movement of the pivot lever 5.1 is also minimized or canceled.
- the Figures 12a, 12b and 12c show a same view of the front vending machine 1 as the Figures 11a, 11b and 11c , where the Figures 12a, 12b and 12c but illustrate another embodiment.
- the piston 35 has no steel disk 40 at its tip.
- a pivoting element 43 is arranged between the piston 35 and the control plate 20.3.
- This pivoting element 43 is pivotally mounted in its center about a vertically oriented pivot axis 44.
- Towards the front, it has a rounded, first foot 45.1, which engages in the laterally flattened indentation 25 of the control plate 20.3.
- the pivoting element On both sides of the ski center, the pivoting element also has a rearwardly directed second or third foot 45.2, 45.3 behind the pivot axis 44.
- these two feet 45.2, 45.3 are supported rearwardly against the piston 35 (see FIG FIG. 12a ).
- the first foot 45.1 of the pivot member 43 is moved, whereby the pivot member 43 is pivoted about its axis 44 (see FIG. 12b ).
- the foot 45.2 of the pivoting element which lies in the direction of movement of the positive control 20, pushes the piston 35 backwards, while the other foot 45.3 no longer touches the piston 35.
- FIG. 12c the front automatic 1 is shown in the holding position from below, wherein the bottom plate 30 is hidden, while the guide member 50 is shown.
- the pivot axis 44 of the pivoting element 43 is mounted in the guide element 50, wherein the Schenkachse 44 but something in the longitudinal direction is movable. It is thereby achieved that, in the blocking position, the piston 35, together with the pivoting element 43, can follow the movement of the control plate 20.3 (here obscured by the guide element 50) in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- FIG. 13a shows each seen from the front of a vertical, running through the positive control 20 cross section through the front vending machine 1.
- the positive control 20 of the front vending machine 1 is located at one end of the positive control path.
- FIG. 13a is the one in the FIGS. 11a, 11 Bund illustrated 11c embodiment shown while in the FIG. 13b that in the Figures 12a, 12b and 12c shown embodiment option is shown.
- Both differ from the previously described embodiments that the arcuate portions of the first slide guides 23.1, 23.2 are wider towards the bottom.
- the first sliding blocks 24.1, 24.3 can move in the arcuate section of the first slide guides 23.1, 23.2 with less frictional resistance.
- the Wegschenken the corresponding pivot lever 5.1, 5.2 is facilitated in the safety release position.
- the holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 which in the FIGS. 13a, 13b shown, rounded free ends.
- the ski boot can be released more easily from the front automatic machine 1 in the event of a lateral safety release.
- this worsens the storage of the ski boot in the front vending machine 1 something.
- the front automatic 1 the shape of the free ends of the retaining spurs 6.1, 6.2 optimized between optimal storage of the ski boot and optimal solubility of the ski boot from the front vending machine 1.
- the holding means can also be designed entirely differently than the holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 shown here.
- FIGs 14a, 14b, 14c and 14d each show an oblique view of another inventive front-end automata 201.
- This front panel 201 is shown in the release position.
- the front automatic 201 is always shown in the holding position, wherein the positive control 220 in the FIG. 14b located in the middle of the forced control path while in FIG. 14c located at one end of the positive control path.
- the front panel 201 in the Figure 14d shown in the safety release position.
- the front panel 201 is aligned obliquely from the upper right to obliquely lower left.
- the front-end automatic 201 is mounted on a ski (not shown), in these figures, the top right of the ski corresponds to the rear, while the bottom left of the ski corresponds to the front. Therefore, in these figures, the ski longitudinal direction runs along an axis from upper right to lower left.
- the Figures 14a, 14b, 14c and 14d above and below also at the front automat 201 above and below.
- the front automatic machine 201 according to the invention shown here differs, inter alia, from the previously described inventive front automatic machine 1 in that the axles (see FIG FIG. 15 ) of the two pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 are mounted on the positive control 220 and that the positive control 220 is movable in the arresting position together with the two pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 substantially in the cross-machine direction along the forced control path. Accordingly, in FIG. 14c to recognize that the two pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 together with the positive control 220 relative to the middle of the positive control path ( FIG. 14b ) are shifted along a linear path in the transverse direction.
- the swiveling lever 205.1 lying in the direction of movement of the positive control 220 can likewise be tilted away in the safety release position, whereby a ski boot (not shown here) held in the automatic front-end machine 201 can be released.
- FIG. 15 shows an exploded view of the in the Figures 14a, 14b, 14c and 14d shown front automata 201.
- the perspective of the presentation is different. So is ābackā in FIG. 15 bottom right, while āfrontā is on the top left.
- the front automaton 201 comprises a substantially flat bottom plate 230, which closes the otherwise downwardly open housing 202 against the bottom.
- This bottom plate 230 may be made of metal or even of another material such as plastic.
- elevations 217.1, 217.2 on the bottom plate 230 which serve as guides for the positive control 220 and for a guide element 250.
- the bottom plate 230 has four vertically aligned openings 231.1, 231.2, 231.3, 231.4 in a substantially square arrangement.
- these openings 231.1, 231.2, 231.3, 231.4 coincide with four vertically aligned openings 232.1, 232.2, 232.3, 232.4 in the housing 202.
- these openings 232.1, 232.2, 232.3 , 232.4 in front of and behind the pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 arranged. They are used to fasten the front automaton 201 on a ski by means of screws.
- a piston 235 made of plastic is arranged in a rear region of the housing 202 in the center of the ski.
- This piston 235 is aligned in the ski longitudinal direction and guided in the ski longitudinal direction.
- the piston 235 has an opening into which a spiral spring 236 oriented in the longitudinal direction of the ski is inserted.
- This coil spring 236 pushes with its rear end against a locking nut 237, which is screwed with a thread on an aligned in the longitudinal direction of adjusting screw 238.
- a head of the adjusting screw 238 is mounted in an opening 239 in a rearwardly directed side wall of the housing 202.
- the adjusting screw 238 is rotatable from the outside through the opening 239.
- the guide element 250 made of steel, aluminum or plastic is mounted in the housing 202 on the bottom plate 230.
- This guide element 250 has in a rear area a bearing bush for supporting a second vertical axis 249 and in a front area on both sides each have an upwardly pointing nubs 251.1, 251.2.
- the guide member 250 seen in the longitudinal direction in a central region a vertically and in Skiquerraum aligned, a front stop 252 forming plate, which delimits a central region 253 of the guide member 250 towards the front.
- This central region 253 is plate-shaped and oriented horizontally. He has on both sides in each case an arm 254.1, 254.1, which are directed from the front side laterally to the rear outside.
- the positive control 220 is movably mounted in the transverse direction. In this case, it is guided between the front stop 252 and the second vertical axis 249 and accordingly prevented from moving in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the guide element 250.
- the positive control 220 comprises two side levers 220.1, 220.2, a pivot element 220.3 and a slide 220.4.
- the carriage 220.4 is between the guide member 250 below and the housing 202 above and movably mounted in the front and rear in the ski direction. It comprises a substantially flat, horizontally oriented, upper surface as well as front and rear each a substantially vertically aligned in the direction of Skiquerides surface. Therefore, a vertical cross-section in the longitudinal direction of the ski through the slide 220.4 has a downwardly open, top-flattened, N-shaped form.
- the pivoting element 220.3 is arranged from behind under the upper surface of the slide 220.4.
- the pivoting element 220.3 is pivotally mounted in its front region by a first vertical axis 248 in a horizontal plane and movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski 220.4.
- the first vertical axis 248 has a roller revolving around the first vertical axis 248.
- the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 are each supported by a second slide guide 221.1, 221.2 in the pivoting element 220.3 with a second sliding block 222.1, 222.2 mounted on the pivoting element 220.3 mounted therein, on the corresponding side lever 220.1, 220.2.
- These two second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 each comprise a roller which encloses the cylindrical core of the corresponding second sliding block 222.1, 222.2. These rollers serve to allow the second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 to be moved with less friction losses in the corresponding second sliding guide 221.1, 221.2.
- the second slide guides 221.1, 221.2 are arranged such that they allow a movement of the pivoting element 220.3 in the longitudinal direction relative to the remaining positive control 220 and thus the side levers 220.1, 220.2 and a rotational movement of the pivoting element 220.3 relative to the remaining positive control 220 and thus the side levers 220.1, 220.2 .
- the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 are held at the same distance from one another, while they are pushed apart or pulled together by a relative movement in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the contraction is thereby by the two arms 254.1, 254.2 of the central region 253 of the guide member 250th supported, which can also cooperate with the second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2, when the guide member 250 is moved backwards.
- one of the two pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 is pivotably mounted about an axis 209.1, 209.2 in an upper region.
- These two axes 209.1, 209.2 are arranged in a plane parallel to each other, wherein two straight lines, which are defined by the two axes 209.1, 209.2, are aligned almost in parallel with each other and run towards each other at an angle of approximately 6 degrees.
- the two pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 are mounted on outer ends of the side levers 220.1, 220.2.
- first sliding block 224.1, 224.2 which in each case has a cylindrical cross-section and is aligned parallel to the axis 209.1, 209.3 of the corresponding lever 205.1, 205.1.
- first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 are each stored in the retaining position and in the release position each in a first slotted guide 223.1, 223.2 of the corresponding side lever 220.1, 220.2.
- the slide 220.4 has two cuts 227.1, 227.2. In this two incisions 227.1, 227.2 can engage two attached to the control lever 203 latch 228.1, 228.2. As a result, the carriage 220.4 can be prevented in the blocking position from moving in the direction of the ski.
- the carriage 220.4 When the front-end machine 201 is in the detent position, the carriage 220.4 may be moved in the skip direction along the constraining control path. In this case, the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 and the two pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 are moved with the carriage 220.4.
- the pivot element 220.3 which is mounted in its front region by the first axis 248 on the slide 220.4 and in its rear region by the second axis 249 on the guide element 250, is pivoted along the positive control path.
- the two second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 are moved in the second sliding guides 221.1, 221.2, wherein the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 are held at an equal distance from each other.
- the coil spring 236 is biased between the piston 235 and the lock nut 237. To the rear, it is supported on the locking nut 237 and the adjusting screw 238 on an inner side of the housing 202.
- the adjusting screw 238, whereby the lock nut 237 is moved forward or backward while the bias of the coil spring 236 can be adjusted.
- the coil spring 236 pushes the piston 235 forward with an adjustable force, where the piston 235 is supported against the pivot member 220.3.
- the piston 235 has a front end with two laterally beveled, vertically aligned surfaces which fit into a V-shaped recess in the rear end of the pivoting element 220.3.
- the pivot member 220.3 When the carriage 220.4 is in a center of the positive control path, the pivot member 220.3 is aligned in the ski longitudinal direction and the piston 235 presses into the V-shaped recess in the rear end of the pivot member 220.3.
- the pivot member 220.3 When the carriage 220.4 is moved laterally along the positive control path, the pivot member 220.3 is laterally pivoted as described.
- the v-shaped indentation in the rear end of the pivoting element 220.3 is also pivoted, wherein an edge of the v-shaped indentation, which lies in the direction of movement of the positive control 220, is pressed against the piston 235.
- FIGS. 16a and 16b each show an enlarged section of the in FIG. 15 It shows one of the two pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2, the holding spurs 206.1, 206.2 arranged in the upper region of the corresponding pivoting lever 205.1, 205.2, the associated axle 209.1, 209.2, and the associated side lever 220.1, 220.2.
- the pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 seen in the longitudinal direction of the ski, have a width which corresponds approximately to three times the length of the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2.
- the cylindrical first Sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 seen in the ski longitudinal direction seen in a center of the pivot lever 205.1, 205.2 are arranged.
- the two side lever 220.1, 220.2 seen in the ski longitudinal direction also have a width which corresponds to about three times the length of the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2.
- the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 on their side facing away from the ski center side in the lower region have an upwardly open hook, which is part of the first slide guide 223.1, 223.2. Seen in the longitudinal direction of the ski, these hooks have an extent which essentially corresponds to the length of the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 and are respectively arranged in the longitudinal direction of the ski in a center of the corresponding side lever 220.1, 220.2.
- the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 each have on their side facing away from the ski center in the lower region a vertically aligned surface, which form the stops 219.1, 219.2 of the first slide guides 223.1, 223.2. Above these lower areas, the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 on their side facing away from the ski center side each have a surface with a concave, substantially quarter-cylindrical curvature. These curvatures run from the bottom outwards to the center of the ski.
- the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 are mounted both in the retaining position and in the release position in the hooks of the first sliding guides 223.1, 223.2.
- the stops 218.1, 218.2 of the pivot lever 205.1, 205.2 with respect to the stops 219.1, 219.2 of the side lever 220.1, 220.2 are arranged.
- Correspondingly causes in the arrest position and in the release position, a force acting outward from the ski center on one of the retaining spurs 206.1, 206.2, a torque on the pivoted on the axes 209.1, 209.2 pivot lever 205.1, 205.2, whereby the lower portions of the pivot lever 205.1, 205.2 are pressed towards the ski center.
- the stops 218.1, 218.2 of the pivot lever 205.1, 205.2 pressed against the stops 219.1, 219.2 of the side lever 220.1, 220.2 and the pivot lever 205.1, 205.2 can be prevented by the side lever 220.1, 220.1 on a pivoting movement.
- the pivot levers 205.2 each have a control jaw 208.2 below the retaining spur 206.2.
- the control jaws 208.2 are a substantially rectangular block, which is arranged on the side of the respective pivot lever 205.2 facing towards the center of the ski, a longitudinal axis of the control jaws 208.2 being oriented from the retaining spine 206.2 to the axis 209.2.
- FIGS. 17a and 17b each show a cross section through the front automaton 201 in the release position.
- the cross-section runs in the vertical direction in the cross-machine direction and a sectional view from the front is shown.
- FIG. 17b whereas the cross-section is in the horizontal direction and a sectional view from below is shown.
- Figure 17a shows that in the front automatic machine 201 in the release position, the two pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 are pivoted apart, so that the two holding spurs 206.1, 206.2 are at the first distance from each other. Since the cross section seen in the longitudinal direction of the ski passes through a center of the side levers 220.1, 220.2 and the rocker arms 205.1, 205.2, it can be seen how the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 are mounted in the hooks of the first slide guides 223.1, 223.2. Since the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 are moved toward one another, the lower regions of the pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 are moved toward one another and the holding spurs 206.1, 206.2 situated above the axes 209.1, 209.2 are moved apart.
- FIG. 17b It can also be seen that the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 are moved towards each other.
- the pivoting element 220.3 after moved back (which corresponds to the right in the figure) and pressed against the piston 235.
- a groove 225 oriented in the longitudinal direction of the ski can be seen in the underside of the slide 220.4.
- an upper end of the first vertical axis 248 is rotatable about a vertical axis and slidably mounted in the longitudinal direction of the ski. This makes it possible for the pivoting element 220.3 to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the remaining positive control 220, with the first vertical axis 248 being moved with the carriage 220.4 when the carriage 220.4 is moved in the transverse direction.
- FIG. 17b shows FIG. 17b in that the pivoting element 220.3 in the release position is moved so far backwards that a front end of the pivoting element 220.3 is moved almost past the two second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 and therefore the two second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 of the second sliding guides 221.1, 221.2 of the pivot member 220.3 are released for movement laterally away from the center of the ski.
- the side levers 220.1, 220.2 are not moved together as far as the center of the ski by the second slide guides 221.1, 221.2.
- This task is performed in the embodiment shown here in the FIG. 15 shown two arms 254.1, 254.2 of the guide member 250, which is also moved backwards. Due to the sectional view in FIG. 17b However, the guide member 250 is not visible.
- the two second slide guides 221.1, 221.2 of the pivoting element 220.3 extend further forward and also in the release position hold the second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 and thus the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 together.
- the geometry of the pivot element 220.3 must be adjusted so that the pivot element 220.3 can continue to fulfill the other functions described below.
- FIGS. 18a and 18b each show a cross section through the front vending machine 201 in the holding position, wherein the positive control 220 is located in the middle of the positive control travel.
- FIG. 18a the cross-section runs in the vertical direction in the cross-machine direction and a sectional view from the front is shown.
- FIG. 18b whereas the cross-section is in the horizontal direction and a sectional view from below is shown.
- FIG. 18a shows that in front locking machine 201 in the holding position, the two pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 are pivoted together, so that the two holding spurs 206.1, 206.2 are at the second distance to each other. Since the cross section seen in the longitudinal direction of the ski passes through a center of the side levers 220.1, 220.2 and the rocker arm 205.1, 205.2, it can be seen how the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 are also mounted in the retaining position in the hooks of the first slide guides 223.1, 223.2.
- FIG. 18b it can be seen that the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 are moved away from each other.
- the pivoting element 220.3 is moved further forward (which corresponds to the left in the figure) compared to the release position and that the piston 235 is also moved further forward.
- the two second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 are guided in the second sliding guides 221.1, 221.2 of the pivoting element 220.3 and prevented from moving in the transverse direction relative to one another. Since the two second slotted guides 221.1, 221.2 diverge away from the center of the ski from the front to the rear, in this position the second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 and thus the side levers 220.1, 220.2 are moved apart in comparison to the release position.
- FIGS. 19a and 19b show how already the Figures 18a and 18b each a cross section through the front automaton 201 in the holding position.
- FIG. 19a the cross-section runs in the vertical direction in the cross-machine direction and a sectional view from the front is shown.
- FIG. 19b whereas the cross-section is in the horizontal direction and a sectional view from below is shown.
- Forced Control 220 in the illustrations shown here is located at almost one end of the positive control path.
- FIG. 19a shows that in the front automatic machine 201 in the holding position with the positive control 220 almost at one end of the positive control travel, the two pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 are also pivoted together and that the two retaining spurs 206.1, 206.2 are also at a second distance from each other.
- the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 continue to be mounted in the hooks of the first slide guides 223.1, 223.2 and that the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 are also further moved apart, whereby the lower portions of the pivot lever 205.1, 205.2 are moved apart , while the above the axes 209.1, 209.2 located holding spurs 206.1, 206.2 are moved together.
- pivoting member 220.3 is pivoted in the direction of movement of the carriage 220.4 when the carriage 220.4 is moved in the cross-machine direction away from the center of the positive control travel.
- the pivoting element 220.3 is in its front region on the first vertical axis 248 in the groove 225 (see Figure 17a ) on the slide 220.4 and in its rear region on the second vertical axis 249 above in a running in the longitudinal direction of the groove 226 in the housing 202 and the bottom of the guide element 250 not visible here.
- the pivoting element 220.3 is pivotably mounted in the housing 220 in both the groove 225 in the slide 220.4 and in the groove 226 and movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski, the pivoting element 220.3 is displaceable in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
- the position of the pivot element 220.3 in the longitudinal direction of the ski is controlled by the bearing of the lower end of the second vertical axis 249 in the guide element 250 by a corresponding positioning of the guide element 250 in the longitudinal direction of the ski (see also FIGS. 15 and 21a, 22 and 23a).
- the two second slotted guides 221.1, 221.2 run from behind towards each other in a curved shape towards each other. They extend on both sides of the first vertical axis 248 arranged from behind the first vertical Axis 248 to before the first vertical axis 248. If the pivoting element 220.3 as in FIG. 19b shown is pivoted laterally relative to a direction parallel to the ski longitudinal direction, according to the two second slide guides 221.1, 221.2 are also swung.
- the ski boot is held between the holding spurs 206.1, 206.2 and the two holding spurs 206.1, 206.2 can not be moved closer to each other. Accordingly, the second sliding block 222.1 can not be moved further in the direction of movement of the slide 220.4 despite being released by the corresponding second slide guide 221.1 in the use of the front automatic machine 201.
- FIGS. 20a and 20b each show a cross section through the front automata 201 in the safety release position.
- the cross-section runs in the vertical direction in the cross-machine direction and a sectional view from the front is shown.
- FIG. 20b whereas the cross-section is in the horizontal direction and a sectional view from below is shown.
- FIG. 20a shows that in the front-mounted machine 201 in the safety release position, the positive control 220 is moved to one end of the positive control travel.
- the pivot lever 205.2 which is arranged on the opposite side of this end of the positive control travel, in the same position as in the detention position (see Figures 18a and 19a ).
- this pivot lever 205.2 is mounted in the hook of the corresponding first slide guide 223.2.
- the other of the two pivoting levers 205.1 is pivoted to the side downwards, as a result of which the holding spur 206.1 of this pivoting lever 205.1 is moved away and a ski boot is released from the front automatic machine 201. It is in the FIG.
- FIG. 20b It can be seen that even in the safety release position, the pivoting element 220.3 is pivoted in the direction of movement of the carriage 220.4. In contrast to the representation in FIG. 19b However, here is the pivot element 220.3 pivoted a little further, whereby the two second slide guides 221.1, 221.2 are still moved a little further. Thus, the second slide guide 221.2 arranged on the side opposite the direction of movement of the slide 220.4 is moved so far forward that the corresponding second slide block 222.2 strikes the rear end of the second slide guide 221.2. By this striking a further movement of the pivoting element 220.3 and thus also of the carriage 220.4 is blocked.
- the first sliding block 224.1 of the corresponding pivoting lever 205.1 is also moved to the center of the ski until the cylindrical first sliding block 224.1 of hooks of the first sliding guide 223.1 and the lower end of the pivoting lever 205.1 from the stop 219.1 (only in FIG. 16a shown) is released and the pivot lever 205.1 can be swung completely to the side.
- This movement of the side lever 220.1 and the pivot lever 205.1 is driven in the event of a lateral safety release by a sideways directed force which acts on the ski boot held in the front automata 201.
- the ski boot even at the end of the dynamic path, still causes a force on the pivoting lever 205.1 lying in the direction of movement. Because the side lever 220.1 belonging to this pivoting lever 205.1 is released towards the center of the ski at the end of the positive control travel from the pivoting element 220.3, the pivoting lever 205.1 can be pushed further away from the ski boot to the side. When the pivot lever 205.1 is pushed away in such a way, the ski boot is initially held by the retaining spurs 206.1 in the bearing bush in the ski boot.
- the second sliding block 222.1 of the side lever 220.1 is also pressed into the v-shaped recess at the front end of the pivoting element 220.3.
- This mechanism has the effect that the second sliding block 222.1 by its positioning in the v-shaped recess at the front end of the pivot member 220.3 prevents snapping back of the pivot member 220.3 in an orientation parallel to the ski longitudinal direction. Accordingly, in the safety release position consisting of the slide 220.4, the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 and the pivot element 220.3 existing forced control 220 blocked. Despite this blocking of the positive control 220, however, the laterally pivoted pivoting lever 205.1 is freely pivotable between a laterally pivoted-out position and an almost upright position.
- FIG. 21a and 21b each show a vertical longitudinal cross section through the front automata 201 in the release position.
- the cross section runs along the center of the ski, while in the FIG. 21b slightly laterally offset to the ski center.
- the control lever 203 standing in the release position with its free end in the longitudinal direction of the ski forward is aligned and that the tread 204 is aligned with its free end obliquely rearwardly above the housing 202 projecting.
- the guide element 250 is displaced towards the housing 202 towards the rear.
- the second vertical axis 249 which is mounted with its lower end on the guide member 250, is moved in the housing 202 in the groove 226 to the rear.
- FIG. 21b the interaction between the control lever 203, the tread 204 and the guide element 250 is illustrated.
- the control lever 203 and the tread spur 204 are both pivotally mounted on the housing 202 about the horizontal axis of the Skiquerachse 207 aligned in Skiquerides.
- the control lever 207 on both sides below the Skiquerachse 207 each have a rounded block 210.
- These blocks 210 are seen in the ski longitudinal direction between the knobs 251.1, 251.2 and the stop 252 of the guide member 250 is arranged.
- these blocks 210 are moved accordingly below the Skiquerachse 207 to the rear.
- the stop 252 of the guide element 250 has a convex curvature on its front side. This curvature is dimensioned and positioned so that the two blocks 210 are in the release position just above the curvature, whereby a relative movement of the blocks 210 is prevented from buckling and, accordingly, a forward movement of the guide member 250 is blocked.
- the blocks 210 When the front panel 201 is brought to the release position by operation of the control lever 203 and the two blocks 210 are moved rearward, the blocks 210 not only push the guide member 250 backward. They also press in their rear, upper area against one below the Skiquerachse 207 arranged stop 211 on the tread 204, whereby the free end of the tread 204 is pivoted upward. If now a ski boot is to be clamped in the front automatic machine 201, then it is sufficient to lower the ski boot correctly positioned on the front automatic machine 201 in the longitudinal direction of the ski. As soon as the sole of the ski boot pushes down the free end of the tread 204, the blocks 210 are pressed backwards via the stop 211.
- the pressure on the blocks 210 is sufficient that they are moved over the curvature on the front side of the stop 252 of the guide element 250, whereby the guide element 250 is released to the front and can be moved forward by the coil spring 236.
- the blocks 210 are also moved further forward via the stop 252, and the control lever 203 is pivoted into a position in which its free end points somewhat obliquely forward at the top.
- the pivoting element 220.3 is moved forward by the movement of the guide element 250, whereby the two pivot levers are collapsed. Accordingly, the front automatic transmission 201 is transferred to the holding position, in which the ski boot is held in the retaining spurs.
- FIG. 22 shows a vertical longitudinal cross-section along the ski center through the front vending machine 201 in the holding position. It can be seen that the control lever 203 is pointing obliquely forward above and that the tread 204 points with its free end horizontally to the rear and rests on the housing 202. It can also be seen that the guide element 250 is moved forward in the housing 202 and that, as a result, the second vertical axis 249 and thus the pivoting element 220.3 are also moved forward.
- FIG. 23a and 23b show how already the Figures 21a and 21b each a vertical longitudinal cross section through the front automaton 201.
- the cross section runs again along the ski center, while in the FIG. 23b slightly laterally offset to the ski center.
- the front panel 201 in the blocking position. This can be seen from the fact that the free end of the control lever 203 in comparison to the release position ( Figures 21a and 21b ) and to the detention position (see FIG. 22 ) is pulled further upwards. A transfer of the Control lever 203 in this position causes the two blocks 210 press with their front ends against the knobs 251.1, 251.2 of the guide member 250.
- FIG. 24a each show a horizontal cross-section through the front automata 201.
- the front panel 201 is shown in the release position while in the FIG. 24b in the arrest position with the positive control 220 in the middle of the forced control path and in the FIG. 24c is shown in the blocking position.
- FIG. 24a around the same representation as FIG. 17b while it is at the FIG. 24b around the same representation as FIG. 18b is.
- the figure sequence 24a, 24b and 24c illustrates how the pivoting element 220.3 is positioned in the release position, the holding position, and the blocking position in the longitudinal direction of the ski. So is in the FIG. 24a to recognize that the pivoting element 220.3 is moved in the release position to almost behind the two second sliding blocks 222.1, 222: 2. In contrast, the pivot element 220.3 is in the holding position and in the blocking position further forward, so that the two second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 are guided on both sides in the second slide guides 221.1, 221.2. In contrast to the retaining position, the pivoting element 220.3 is pulled slightly further forward in the blocking position.
- the two second sliding blocks 222.1, 222.2 are placed slightly farther back in the two first slotted guides 221.1, 221.2 and accordingly moved a little further apart.
- the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 are also moved a little further apart and the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 are slightly pivoted together with their upper ends.
- the two retaining spurs are moved closer to each other. If a ski boot is held in the front automatic machine 201, the retaining spurs are thereby pressed further into the two lateral bearing bushes in the toe area of the ski boot during the transfer into the blocking position, as a result of which the ski boot is held even better.
- the carriage 220 is also blocked in the middle of the positive control path.
- the carriage 220.4 has two notches 227.1, 227.2 at its front, upper side edge.
- this two incisions 227.1, 227.2 can be two attached to the control lever 203 latch 228.1, 228.2 engage when the control lever 203 is brought into the blocking position.
- This blocking has the advantage that, for example, during the ascent, when the ski boot is held only in the front automaton 201 and released by the heel counter, an unintentional lateral release is prevented.
- the control lever 203 is positioned differently in the release position, the holding position, as well as the blocking position.
- the free end of the control lever 203 is pulled up both in the blocking position and in the holding position relative to the release position. Therefore, the front-end automatic 201 also allows as already in FIG. 9 for the front vending machine 1 shown a trigger in the forward direction by the ski boot in the front vending machine 201 is pivoted forward until a tip of the ski boot pushes the control lever 203 down to the release position.
- This Frontalausaims can both be done when the front panel 201 is in the hold position as well as in the blocking position.
- the carriage 220.4 is not rectilinearly shaped in the direction of the ski, but slightly curved backwards on both sides. This curvature corresponds to a circular section of a circle with a radius of about 300 mm.
- the two axes are 209.1, 209.2 as already mentioned not aligned in the longitudinal direction, but towards the rear in a 6 degree angle converging.
- the front automatic 201 also allows a lateral safety release in the arresting position.
- the ski boot can make a rotational movement with such a lateral safety release. He is only released laterally from the front automaton 201, while he is still held by the holding spurs of the heel unit. As soon as the ski boot is released from the front automatic 201, it can also be released from the heel counter by being moved away from the holding spurs of the heel counter. Accordingly, a lateral safety release option is unnecessary by the heel counter. It is sufficient if the automatic heel unit allows a safety release in the forward direction.
- the front automatic 201 is optimized for lateral safety release in a touring ski binding system in which the automatic heel unit does not allow lateral safety release.
- the ski boot is rotated about a vertical axis with a lateral safety release until it is released from the front automatic 201.
- the pivoting movement of the pivoting lever 205.1, 205.2 located in the direction of movement is perpendicular to the direction of movement of the ski boot.
- the alignment of the axles 209.1, 209.2 is optimized for a rotational movement of the ski boot in the event of a lateral safety release.
- FIG. 25 shows an exploded view of another inventive front automatic device 301 from the perspective of an oblique view, in which "backā in the figure is below right, while āfrontā is the top left.
- back in the figure is below right
- front is the top left.
- the front panel 301 shown here is very similar to the front panel 201 constructed, which in the FIGS. 14a to 24c is shown. Accordingly, the operation of the two front automata 201, 301 is very similar. Structural differences and differences in the operation of the two front automata 201, 301 are described below. Elements and positions of the front automatic machine 301 shown here correspond to the above-described elements or positions of the front automatic machine 201.
- the front automatic device 301 like the front automatic device 201 described above, comprises inter alia a substantially flat bottom plate 330, a housing 302, a Control lever 303, a piston 335 and a coil spring 336.
- the front panel 301 together with the two pivot levers 305.1, 305.2 also a positive control 320, which in turn comprises two side levers 320.1, 320.2, a pivot member 320.3 and a carriage 320.4.
- the piston 335 and the pivoting element 320.3 of the positive control 320 are shaped differently.
- the piston 235 has, for example, at its front end no tip, but a vertically oriented in Skiquerides face with a arranged in its center round, concave recess, while the pivot member 320.3 in its rear end no horizontal, substantially V-shaped recess, but has two rounded, laterally facing feet. The interaction of these feet with the front end of the piston 335 causes a different course of the strength of the restoring force in response to the orientation of the pivot member 320.3.
- Both the shape of the front end of the piston 235 and the shape of the rear end of the pivot member 320.3 with or without laterally facing feet can also be modified to the curve of the strength of the restoring force in response to the orientation of the pivot member 320.3 for a to optimize lateral safety release process.
- the pivoting element 320.3 does not each comprise an arm on both sides.
- the second slide guides 321.1, 321.2 on the pivoting element 320.3 do not surround the second sliding blocks 322.1, 322.2, but instead support the second sliding blocks 322.1, 322.2 only against movement toward the center of the ski.
- This one-sided support is also given in the first slide guides 323.1, 323.2 and the first sliding blocks 324.1, 324.2.
- the side levers 320.1, 320.2 each have a first slotted guide 323.1, 323.2 at their sides which are averted from the ski center.
- the first slotted guides 323.1, 323.2 of the front automaton 301 shown here In contrast to the first slotted guides 223.1, 223.2 of the side lever 220.1, 220.2 of the front vending machine 201, the first slotted guides 323.1, 323.2 of the front automaton 301 shown here but no hooks, but only one stop 319.1, 319.2, against which from a mutual stop 318.1 , 318.2 existing first sliding blocks 324.1, 324.2 pending.
- the front automatic 301 shown here comprises two leg springs 329.1, 329.2 (see also FIG. 26 ).
- leg springs 329.1, 329.2 Depending on one of these leg springs 329.1, 329.2 is guided around one of the axes (not shown here) of the pivot lever 305.1, 305.2.
- the torsion springs 329.1, 329.2 are each supported against the carriage 320.4 and the corresponding pivot lever 305.1, 305.2 and press the upper part of this pivot lever 305.1, 305.2 to the outside, so that the two holding spurs 306.1, 306.2 are each pressed apart as much as possible.
- the second sliding blocks 322.1, 322.2 which are arranged in the lower region of the pivot levers 305.1, 305.2, are pressed against the second sliding guides 321.1, 321.2 arranged on the side levers 320.1, 320.2.
- leg springs 329.1, 329.2 are each additionally supported on the respective side lever 320.1, 320.2, whereby the side levers 320.1, 320.2 are pressed towards the ski center.
- the first sliding blocks 324.1, 324.2 arranged on the side levers 320.1, 320.2 are also pressed against the first slide guides 323.1, 323.2 arranged on the pivoting element 320.3. This allows the upper ends of the pivot levers 305.1, 305.2 to move apart as far as possible, respectively. At the same time, however, they can be swiveled towards the center of the ski if necessary. This can be useful, for example, if no ski boot in the front automata 301 is held.
- the pivot levers 305.1, 305.2 are subjected to a lower load because they can be moved against the spring force of the coil springs 329.1, 329.2 towards the center of the ski. Accordingly, this reduces the risk of damaging the Fronautomaten 301.
- the two leg springs 329.1, 329.2 be supported only on the carriage 320.4 and the respective pivot lever 305.1, 305.2.
- the two torsion springs 329.1, 329.2 can also be supported elsewhere and differently and can also be replaced by a different type of elastic element which can exert a tensile or compressive force. It is also possible that each side of the respective pivot lever 305.1, 305.2 is pressed or pulled by a first elastic element against the corresponding side lever 320.1, 320.2, while the respective side lever 320.1, 320.2 is pressed or pulled by a second elastic element to the ski center becomes.
- FIG. 25 In the exploded view in FIG. 25 is not shown a guide element, which the guide member 250 of the in FIGS. 14a to 24c shown front panel 201 corresponds.
- the in FIG. 25 Although shown front-end 301 may also include such a guide element. If, however, the second slide guides 321.1, 321.2 on the pivoting element 320.3 seen from rear to front only slightly run towards each other, then such a guide element can be dispensed with.
- FIG. 26 shows an enlarged section of the in FIG. 25 It shows one of the two side levers 320.1 and the leg spring belonging to the corresponding side 329.1.
- the leg spring 329.1 has a forward facing leg 328.1, which is supported in the assembled state of the front automatic device 301 on an upper side of the carriage 320.4, and that the leg spring 329.2 has an upwardly pointing leg 328.2, which in the assembled state the front automatic machine 301 is supported against the pivot lever 305.1.
- leg spring 329.1 has a downwardly pointing leg 328.3, which in the assembled state of the front automatic machine 301 is inserted into an opening 327 in the side lever 320.1, whereby a movement of the side lever 320.1 both away from the ski center and towards the center of the ski can be controlled by the leg spring 329.1.
- the side lever 320.1 has an upper and a lower plate in a central region and in a region facing the center of the ski. Between these two plates is a gap, in which the second sliding block 322.1 is arranged.
- the pivoting element 320.3 is disposed at a height of this gap and can be moved in a pivoting movement to parts in this space.
- the upper of the two plates extends laterally beyond the side lever 320.1, ie, in the longitudinal direction of the ski, towards the front and to the rear, slightly beyond the remaining side lever 320.1.
- the Figures 27a, 27b and 27c show a bottom view of the in the FIGS. 25 and 26 shown front panel 301, wherein the bottom plate 330 is hidden.
- the Figures 27a and 27b is the front panel 301 in the hold position.
- the forced control 320 is in Figure 27a shown in the middle of the forced control path while in the Figure 27b is shown at almost one end of the forced control path.
- the front panel 301 is in the Figure 27c in the safety release position and one of the two pivot levers 305.1 is folded down.
- the side lever 320.1 which belongs to the downwardly pivoted pivot lever 305.1, pushed towards the center of the ski.
- the corresponding second sliding block 322.1 is located in front of the swivel element 320.3 pivoted to the side and blocks a movement of the swivel element 320.1 back into a ski-parallel alignment.
- 305.1 space is released on the side facing away from the ski center side of the side lever 320.1 from the pivot lever. Therefore, the side lever 320.1 by the leg spring 329.1 (see FIG. 25 ) are moved away from the ski center to the outside, whereby the pivot member 320.3 is released. This allows the positive control 320 to be moved back to the center of the positive control path.
- a lever can be arranged in each case between the pivot lever 305.1, 305.2 and the corresponding side lever 320.1, 320.2.
- the side lever 302.1, 302.2 of a pivoted down pivot lever 305.1, 305.2 are pulled outwards, when the pivoted down pivot lever 305.1, 305.2 is pivoted upwards by the skier.
- the levers can also be arranged loosely between the pivot levers 305.1, 305.2. It is sufficient if the levers pull the corresponding side lever 320.1, 320.2 outward only when pivoting a pivot lever 305.1, 305.2 upward.
- pivoting element 320.3 depending on the positioning of the positive control 320 in the positive control path to parts between the plates of the side levers 320.1, 320.2 is moved.
- the interaction of the piston 335 can be seen with the laterally facing feet of the pivot member 320.3, which of the v-shaped recess in the pivot member 220.3 and the converging at the front end substantially 235 of the piston in the FIGS. 14a to 24c differentiates front-end machine 201.
- the two side levers 320.1, 320.2 but also be designed differently.
- they can not be displaceably mounted in the carriage 320.4 in the direction of the ski, but can each be mounted so as to be pivotable about a vertical axis on the carriage 320.4. This allows a mode of action of the two side levers as a lever arm by one translated by the pivot levers 305.1, 305.2 transmitted to the pivot member 320.3 force or is reduced.
- the side levers can each, for example, each have a substantially elongate shape and each be oriented substantially in the longitudinal direction of the ski, wherein the vertical axis is arranged in the region of a first end of the side lever for each side lever.
- the side levers viewed in their longitudinal direction, cooperate with the corresponding pivoting lever in their middle region and interact with the pivoting element in a region of their second end, a reduction of a force transmitted to the pivoting element by the pivoting levers is achieved.
- the frictional force between the side levers and the pivot member is reduced.
- FIG. 28 shows an exploded view of another inventive front automatic device 401 from the perspective of an oblique view, in which "backā in the figure is below right, while āfrontā is the top left.
- FIG. 28 shown front automatic 401 is very similar to the two front automata 201, 301 constructed, which in the FIGS. 14a to 24c or 25 to 27c are shown. Accordingly, the operation of the three front automata 201, 301, 401 is very similar.
- FIG. 28 shown front automata 401 for front automata 301 which in the FIGS. 25 to 27c is shown, larger than the front automaton 201, which in the FIGS. 14a to 24c is shown. Therefore, the structural differences and differences in the operation of the front automata 401 described here are described below in connection with FIGS FIGS. 25 to 27c described front automata 301 explained.
- the front-end machine 401 like the front-end machine 301 described above, includes a housing 402, a control lever 403, a piston 435 and a coil spring 436. Furthermore, the front-end machine 401 also includes a positive control in addition to the two pivoting levers 405.1, 405.2 420th
- a first essential difference to in the FIGS. 25 to 27c Front automatic machine 301 shown is that the priority control 420 of the front automatic 401 is constructed differently.
- the positive control 420 likewise comprises a pivoting element 420.3 and a slide 420.4.
- the positive control 320 of the front automatic machine 301 does not include two side levers. Therefore, in front automatic machine 401, the two pivoting levers 405.1, 405.2 interact directly with the pivoting element 420.3. To make this possible, point the two Pivoting lever 405.1, 405.2 of the front automatic 401 below the axes 409.1, 409.2 each one pointing to the ski center stop 412.1, 412.2.
- the pivoting element 420.3 has a different shape than the previously described front automatic machine 301, so that it can interact with the two stops 412.1, 412.2 of the pivot lever 405.1, 405.2.
- the carriage 420.4 is shaped differently than the carriage 320.4 of the previously described front-end machine 320.
- the pivoting element 420.3 is mounted in a central region of the carriage 420.4 in a slot 420.5 extending horizontally from a rear side to a front side of the carriage 420.4.
- the two side levers 405.1, 405.2 each have a cover 413.1, 413.2 at a height of the axles 409.1, 409.2.
- covers 413.1, 413.2 each extend slightly closer to the ski center than the stop 412.1, 412.2 of the corresponding pivot lever 405.1, 405.2 and fill in the holding position and in the release position of the front vending machine 401 the recesses 425.1, 425.2 in the surface of the carriage 420.4. So that these covers 413.1, 413.2 do not hit the sole of a ski boot held in the ski binding during a lateral safety release, the upper regions of the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 are bent backwards, so that the two retaining spurs 406.1, 406.2 behind the stops 412.1, 412.2 and covers 413.1, 413.2. It is thereby achieved that the cover 413.1, 413.2 of the laterally tilting pivot lever 405.1, 405.1 can be pivoted upwards in the event of a lateral safety release in front of the sole of the ski boot.
- a second essential difference between the front-mounted machine shown here 401 and in the FIGS. 25 to 27c Front automatic machine 301 shown is that the front automatic 401 not only one, but two bottom plates 430.1, 430.2 and a holding element 430.3 includes.
- a first bottom plate is used 430.1 as a guide for the movement of the carriage 420.4 in Skiquerides. It has in its front area in front of the guide for the carriage 420.4 two openings 431.1, 431.4, through which screws can be guided for fastening the front automatic machine 401 to a ski.
- a second base plate 430.2 also has two openings 431.2, 431.3 in its front region, through which screws can be guided on a ski for fastening the front automatic machine 401.
- This second floor panel 430.2 is arranged behind the first floor panel 430.1 and serves as a base for the retaining element 430.3, which also has two openings 433 for attachment to a ski.
- This holding element 430.3 is formed from a piece of sheet metal. In a cross section oriented vertically in the transverse direction, this holding element 430.3 has a substantially U-shape, wherein the two upper edges are bent inwards. As a result, the holding element 430.3 forms a rail-like longitudinal guide for the housing 402 of the front automatic machine 401, wherein the housing 402 of the front automatic machine 401 can not be moved upwards relative to the holding element 430.3.
- the front-end machine 401 when the front-end machine 401 is mounted on a ski, four screws are guided through four vertically aligned openings 432.1, 432.2, 432.3, 432.4 arranged in the housing 402 and bolted to the ski.
- the two front screws extend both through the two front openings 432.1, 432.4 of the housing 402 and through the two openings 431.1, 431.4 of the first floor panel 430.1 and hold the housing 402 and the first floor panel 430.1 firmly on the ski.
- the two rear screws are guided in the attachment of the front vending machine 401 through the rear openings 432.2, 432.3 of the housing 402 down through where they pass through the two openings in the support member 430.3 and through the two openings 431.2, 431.3 of the second bottom plate 430.2 and only hold the retaining element 430.3 and the second base plate 430.2 on the ski. Therefore, in the mounted state, when the front-end machine 401 is mounted on a ski, the housing 402 is bolted to the ski only by the two front screws. By contrast, the rear region of the housing 402 is held in the longitudinal guide of the retaining element 430.3 screwed to the ski and can move in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the retaining element 430.3.
- a third major difference between the front automata shown here 401 and in the FIGS. 14a to 24c or 25 to 27c shown front automata 201, 301 is that the front automatic 401 has a damper position instead of a blocking position.
- the control lever 403 of the front automatic machine 401 shown here does not comprise a bolt with which a movement of the carriage 420.4 in the direction of the ski can be blocked.
- the control lever 403 comprises two bulges 428.1, 428.2, which press from the front against a front side of the carriage 420.4, when the control lever 403 is moved upward in a damper position.
- a movement of the carriage 420.4 in the transverse direction is occupied by friction with an increased resistance to movement.
- the carriage 420.4 can be moved in the damper position of the front automatic machine 401 less well in the cross-machine direction. Therefore, when the damper position is used in ascending, the ski is prevented from slipping back and forth with respect to the ski boot held in the front automaton 401. Accordingly, the slip resistance increases the safety for the skier due to the damper position. At the same time in the damper position but still a lateral safety release done, whereby the safety of the skier is guaranteed even in the damper position.
- FIGS. 29a, 29b and 29c each show a bottom view of a horizontally oriented cross-section through the front vending machine 401, which in each case passes through the pivot member 420.3 and through the horizontal slot 420.5 in the carriage 420.4.
- the pivoting element 420.3 as in the case of the two front automata 201, 301, is pivotably mounted on the carriage 420.4 about a first vertical axis 448, wherein the first vertical axis 448 can be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the ski relative to the carriage 420.4.
- the pivoting element 420.3 is mounted behind the carriage 420.4 about a second vertical axis 449 pivotally mounted on the housing 402 of the front automatic machine 401, wherein the second vertical axis 449 relative to the housing 402 is displaceable in the longitudinal direction.
- the pivoting element 420.3 has an elongated shape. In this case, a longitudinal axis of the pivoting element 420.3 is aligned parallel to the longitudinal direction of the ski when the positive control 420 is in the middle of the positive control travel.
- the swiveling element 420.3 has two feet projecting laterally from the longitudinal axis of the swiveling element 420.3 and pointing obliquely backwards. With these feet, the pivoting element 420.3 is supported against a metal face 437 of the piston 435. In this case, the support of the pivoting member 420.3 against the piston 435 as in the gift element 43 of the works in the Figures 12a, 12b and 12c shown variant of the front vending machine 1.
- the pivoting element 420.3 disposed slightly in front of the first vertical axis 448, has two arms 440.1, 440.2, which project slightly to the front and project laterally from the longitudinal axis of the pivoting element 420.3.
- These two arms 440.1, 440.2 have outer ends, which are rounded and are curved towards each other from the back to the front from the outside to the center of the ski. These outer ends serve as gate guides for the stops 412.1, 412.2 of the pivot lever 405.1, 405.2.
- the pivoting element 420.3 comprises a head 441 arranged between its two arms 440.1, 440.2.
- This head 441 is arranged in front of the first vertical axis 448 and has a forwardly aligned side with a latching position. A flat region of this forward-facing side is aligned substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pivot member 420.3.
- the control lever 403 presses against the head 441 of the pivot member 420.3.
- the leg member 420.3 in the release position compared to the locking position is moved together with the piston 435 against the spring force of the coil spring 436 to the rear.
- the two arms 440.1, 440.2 of the pivoting element 420.3 against the stops 412.1, 412.2 of the pivot lever 405.1, 405.2 moved backwards.
- the outer ends of the two arms 440.1, 440.2 which are bent toward one another toward the center of the ski, give the stops 412.1, 412.2 more space for movement toward the center of the ski compared to the arresting position.
- 29b shown in the middle of the positive control travel are also the two arms 440.1, 440.2 of the pivot member 420.3 so far forward in the carriage 420.4 that the stops 412.1, 412.2 of the two pivot lever 405.1, 405.2 in the rear region of the outer ends of the arms 440.1, 440.2 butt against the outer ends of arms 440.1, 440.2. Since the outer ends of the two arms 440.1, 440.2 are spaced furthest apart in their rear region, the stops 412.1, 412.2 are also moved further apart in comparison to the release position. This results in that the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 are pivoted together, so that the two holding spurs are at the second distance from each other.
- FIG. 29b In contrast to FIG. 29b is the front 401 in the Figure 29c shown in the safety release position with a pivoted laterally pivot lever 405.1.
- the positive control 420 is moved to one end of the positive control travel, whereby the pivoting element 420.3 is pivoted about the first vertical axis 448 and about the second vertical axis 449 to the side of the released by the safety release pivot lever 405.1.
- the arm 440.1 of the pivoting element 420.3 against which the pivoted-away pivot lever 405.1 is supported in the retaining position by its stop 412.1, is moved backwards. Accordingly, the stop is 412.1 of the pivoted-away pivot lever 405.1 seen in the ski longitudinal direction in front of the arm 440.1 of the pivot member 405.1.
- the pivoting lever 405.1 Since the pivoting lever 405.1 is thus released from the pivoting element 420.3, it is pivoted outwards by the leg spring 429.1 with the retaining spur while its stop 412.1 is moved towards the center of the ski. Because this causes the stop 412.1 in front of the arm 440.1 of the pivoting element 420.3, the stop 412.1 prevents the arm 440.1 of the pivoting element 420.3 from being moved forward again. Accordingly, this restricts movement of the positive control 420 back to the center of the positive control travel. Only when the pivoted-pivot lever 405.1 is pivoted by the skier back to the ski center, the arm 440.1 of the pivot member 420.3 is released again, whereby the positive control 420 can be moved by the spring force of the coil spring 436 back to the center of the positive control travel.
- the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 can be pivoted against the spring force of the torsion springs 429.1, 429.2 with the retaining spurs to the center of the ski. Therefore, if a ski with the front vending machine 401 falls over and hits with a pivot lever 405.1, 405.2, the corresponding pivot lever 405.1, 405.2 can be pivoted towards the ski center inwards, whereby the risk of damage to the front vending machine 401 is reduced.
- FIG. 30a is the front automatic 401 in the release position. Accordingly, the control lever 403 is pivoted with its free end to the Skiquerachse 407 down and is in the release position. As a result, a latching unit 408, which is arranged on the control lever 403 below the crossbar axis 407 and moves concentrically about the crossbar axis, is moved backwards and presses the head 441 of the pivoting element 420.3 backwards. In this case, a rear end of the latching unit 408 is locked in the latching position on the head 441 of the pivoting element 420.3. This engagement prevents the coil spring 436 from forcing the piston 435 and the pivot member 420.3 forward and allowing the control lever 403 to move to its retaining position.
- the control lever 403 In order to move the front automatic machine 401 from the release position into the retaining position, the control lever 403 can be pulled slightly upwards. This is sufficient to release the latching unit 408 from the latching position on the head 441 of the pivoting element 420.3. As soon as the latching unit 408 has been released from the latching position, the latching unit 408 is moved forward by the spiral spring 436 together with the pivoting element 420.3 and the piston 435. As a result, the control lever 403 is pivoted upwards with its free end and transferred to the holding position. As a variant of this, the tread spurs consisting of a base element 404.1 and a wire hoop 404.2 can also be pressed down to transfer the front automatic machine 401 into the holding position.
- the base member 404.1 of the tread spur is pivoted about the skiver axis 407.
- the control lever 403 by a stop 410 of the base member 404.1, which is present at a counterpart of the control lever 403, moved along.
- the latching unit 408 is also released from the latching position on the head 441 of the pivoting element 420.3, after which the control lever 403 is moved by the coil spring 436 into the holding position and the front-mounted machine 401 into the holding position.
- the front automatic 401 is shown in the arresting position. Therefore, the free end of the control lever 403 is slightly higher up than in the release position, while the locking unit 408 of the control lever 403 is located slightly further forward than in the release position. Accordingly, two on a lower side of the locking unit 408 successively arranged detent positions 408.1 408.2 are slightly further forward than in the release position. The front of the two detent positions 408.1 is pulled onto a front, upstanding edge of the first bottom plate 430.1 and locked on this front, upstanding edge of the first bottom plate 430.1. As a result, the control lever 403 is locked in its holding position.
- FIG. 30c the front 401 is shown in the damper position. Compared to the holding position, therefore, the free end of the control lever 403 is moved further upwards. Accordingly, the control lever 403 is further pivoted about the Skiquerachse 407, whereby the locking unit 408 of the control lever 403 is further moved upwards. As a result, the rear of the two locking positions 408.2 is pulled onto the front, upstanding edge of the first floor panel 430.1 and locked onto this front, upstanding edge of the first floor panel 430.1. Therefore, the control lever 403 is locked in its damper position. In addition, by this positioning of the control lever 403 in the damper position, the two in FIG.
- the stops 412.1, 412.2 on the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 also be designed differently.
- the function of the stops 412.1, 412.2 can also be taken over by a further element.
- the stops 412.1, 412.2 per pivot lever 405.1, 405.2 each be provided a roller which is rotatably mounted about an axis on the corresponding pivot lever 405.1, 405.2.
- These rollers may for example be arranged such that their axes in the release position and in the holding position are aligned substantially vertically and that the rollers on the outer ends of the arms 440.1, 440.2 of the pivot member 420.3 can roll.
- the rollers instead of the stops 412.1, 412.2 can be regarded as the first sliding blocks, while the outer ends of the arms 440.1, 440.2 of the pivot member 420.3 can be regarded as the first link guides.
- FIGS. 28 to 30c shown front automata 401
- the function of the stops 412.1, 412.2 on the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 but also, for example, by pivotally mounted on the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 pivot arms are taken.
- Such a front automatic 501 is for example in the following FIG. 31 shown.
- FIG. 31 shows an exploded view of another inventive front automatic device 501 from the perspective of an oblique view, in which "backā in the figure below right is, while āfrontā is the top left. To improve the clarity of the presentation, not all, but only the most important elements for understanding the front automatic 501 are shown.
- a first essential difference between the front automatic machine 501 shown here and the front automatic machine 401, which is incorporated in the FIGS. 28 to 30c is shown is the
- the two pivoting levers 505.1, 505.2 are also pivotably mounted on a carriage 520.4 in a central region about axes oriented substantially in the longitudinal direction of the ski (not shown).
- the pivot levers 505.1, 505.2 do not comprise stops pointing to the center of the ski, but each comprise a pivoting arm 517.1, 517.2 pointing to the center of the ski.
- pivot arms 517.1, 517.2 each have an elongated shape and are each mounted in the region of a lower end of the corresponding pivot lever 505.1, 505.2 about a substantially aligned in the longitudinal direction axis (not shown) pivotally mounted on the corresponding pivot lever 505.1, 505.2.
- these two pivot arms 517.1, 517.2 essentially point horizontally to the center of the ski and interact with the pivot element 520.3 with a free end, which lies opposite the bearing on the respective pivot lever 505.1, 505.2.
- the pivoting element 520.3 has no head against which the control lever 503 could push in order to push the pivoting element 520.3 backwards.
- the pivoting element 520.3 of the front automatic machine 501 shown here is likewise mounted pivotably on the carriage 520.4 about a first vertical axis 548. This first vertical axis 548 is also also slidably mounted in the ski longitudinal direction on the carriage 520.4.
- this first vertical axis 548 has at its upper end a rectangular, elongate element 550, which is aligned in the longitudinal direction of the ski and is displaceably mounted in the longitudinal direction of the ski 520.4.
- This rectangular element 550 extends with its front end into a region of a front end of the carriage 520.4. Therefore, when the control lever 503 is pivoted downwardly with its free end and thereby the latch unit 508 of the control lever 503 is moved rearward, the latch unit 508 does not push a head of the pivot member 520.3 but the front end of the rectangular member 550 backward. As a result, the rectangular member 550 is moved rearward along with the first vertical axis 548, thereby also moving the pivot member 520.3 rearwardly.
- the pivot arms 517.1, 517.2 on the pivot levers 505.1, 505.2 also be designed differently.
- the pivot arms 517.1, 517.2 can be shaped differently. But they can for example also have at their free ends depending on a roller which is mounted rotatably about an axis on the corresponding pivot arm 517.1, 517.2. These rollers may for example be arranged such that their axes are aligned vertically when the pivot arms 517.1, 517.2 are aligned horizontally. This can be achieved that the rollers can roll on the outer side edges of the pivot member 520.3.
- the rollers instead of the free ends of the pivot arms 517.1, 517.2 be considered as the first sliding blocks, while the outer side edges of the pivot member 520.3 can be regarded as a first slide guides.
- the invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments of the front automatic 1 and the four other front automata 201, 301, 401 and 501.
- features of the front automata 1, 201, 301, 401 and 501 can be combined as desired.
- the front automata 401, 501 instead of the damper position also have a blocking position or neither a damper position nor a blocking position.
- the same applies to the front automata 1, 201 and 301 instead of the blocking position have a damper position or neither a damper position nor a blocking position.
- both the first and the second slide guides can be replaced by other guides.
- One way to do this is to use dovetail guides with a carriage guided thereon.
- the first slide guides can not be arranged on the positive control, but on the housing of the front automata.
- the two axes can be arranged on the positive control instead of the housing.
- the bearing of the two pivot levers on the positive control can also be arranged below the axes about which the pivot levers are pivotable.
- pivoting the pivot lever lying in the direction of movement can be achieved, for example, by arranging a guide for the pivot levers on the housing of the front automat, which releases the corresponding pivot lever as soon as the end of the positive control path is reached.
- the positive control at the end of the positive control travel abuts an obstacle, whereby a release mechanism is operated on the positive control, which releases the corresponding lever for a pivoting movement.
- the invention is not limited to these variants of the front automate. There are also other embodiments possible.
Landscapes
- Footwear And Its Accessory, Manufacturing Method And Apparatuses (AREA)
- Basic Packing Technique (AREA)
Abstract
Description
Die Erfindung betrifft einen Frontautomat fĆ¼r eine Skibindung, insbesondere eine Tourenskibindung. Dieser Frontautomat umfasst zwei in SkilƤngsrichtung gesehen seitlich angeordnete, sich gegenĆ¼ber liegende Hebel mit je einem Haltemittel zum Halten eines Skischuhs in einem Zehenbereich des Skischuhs. Die beiden Hebel sind je derart um eine Achse schwenkbar gelagert, dass die Haltemittel bei einer Schwenkbewegung der Hebel um diese Achsen in eine Skiquerrichtung bewegt werden. Der Frontautomat weist eine Freigabestellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem ersten Abstand zueinander befinden. Zudem weist er eine Festhaltestellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden, welcher kleiner als der erste Abstand ist.The invention relates to a front automatic for a ski binding, in particular a touring ski binding. This front-mounted machine comprises two levers which are arranged laterally in the longitudinal direction of the ski and each have a holding means for holding a ski boot in a toe region of the ski boot. The two levers are each mounted such pivotable about an axis that the holding means are moved in a pivotal movement of the lever about these axes in a Skiquerrichtung. The front automatic machine has a release position, in which the two holding means are at a first distance from each other. In addition, it has a holding position, in which the two holding means are at a second distance from each other, which is smaller than the first distance.
Hinsichtlich ihrer Funktion sind Skibindungen unterteilbar in Pistenbindungen, die nur zum Abfahren und Skifahren an Skiliften verwendet werden, und Tourenbindungen, die zusƤtzlich auch zum Gehen auf Skiern, insbesondere zum Aufsteigen mit Hilfe von an den Skiern befestigten Steigfellen, verwendet werden. WƤhrend Erstere bloss eine zuverlƤssige Fixierung des Skischuhs auf dem Ski in einer sogenannten Abfahrtsstellung zu gewƤhrleisten haben, mĆ¼ssen Letztere zum Aufsteigen zusƤtzlich von der Abfahrtsstellung in eine Aufstiegsstellung gebracht werden kƶnnen, in welcher der Skischuh um eine Achse in Skiquerrichtung verschwenkbar im Fersenbereich vom Ski abhebbar ist, um zum Gehen eine Gelenkbewegung zwischen dem Skischuh und dem Ski zu ermƶglichen.In terms of their function, ski bindings are subdivided into piste bindings, which are used only for downhill skiing and downhill skiing, and touring bindings, which are also used for walking on skis, in particular for ascending with the help of climbing skins attached to the skis. While the former only have to ensure a reliable fixation of the ski boot on the ski in a so-called downhill position, the latter must be brought to ascend additionally from the downhill to a climbing position in which the ski boot is pivotable about an axis in Skiquerrichtung pivotally in the heel area of the ski to allow for joint movement between the ski boot and the ski to go.
Tourenskibindungen wiederum sind in zwei Typen unterteilbar. Der eine Typ umfasst einen gegenĆ¼ber dem Ski verschwenkbaren SkischuhtrƤger, an welchem der Skischuh durch Bindungsbacken gehalten ist. Ein reprƤsentatives Mitglied dieses Typs von Tourenskibindungen ist beispielsweise in der
FĆ¼r die Beschreibung von derartigen Bindungssystemen wird als Referenzsystem oft ein (fiktiver) Ski verwendet, wobei angenommen wird, dass die Bindung auf diesem Ski montiert sei. Diese Gewohnheit wird im vorliegenden Text Ć¼bernommen. So bedeutet der Begriff "SkilƤngsrichtung" entlang der Ausrichtung der LƤngsachse des Skis. Ćhnlich bedeutet "skiparallel" fĆ¼r ein lƤngliches Objekt entlang der LƤngsachse des Skis ausgerichtet. FĆ¼r ein flƤchiges Objekt hingegen bedeutet der Begriff "skiparallel" parallel zur GleitflƤche des Skis ausgerichtet. Weiter ist mit dem Begriff "Skiquerrichtung" eine Richtung quer zur SkilƤngsrichtung gemeint, welche aber nicht genau rechtwinklig zur LƤngsachse des Skis orientiert sein muss. Ihre Ausrichtung kann auch etwas von einem rechten Winkel abweichen. Der Begriff "Skimitte" wiederum bedeutet in Skiquerrichtung gesehen eine Mitte des Skis, wƤhrend der Begriff "skifest" nicht beweglich gegenĆ¼ber dem Ski bedeutet. Zudem ist zu beachten, dass auch Begriffe, welche das Wort "Ski" nicht enthalten, auf das Referenzsystem des (fiktiven) Skis Bezug nehmen. So beziehen sich die Begriffe "vorne", "hinten", "oben", "unten" sowie "seitlich" auf "vorne", "hinten", "oben", "unten" sowie "seitlich" des Skis. Genauso beziehen sich auch Begriffe wie "horizontal" und "vertikal" auf den Ski, wobei "horizontal" in einer skiparallelen Ebene liegend und "vertikal" senkrecht zu dieser Ebene ausgerichtet bedeutet.For the description of such binding systems, a (fictitious) ski is often used as the reference system, assuming that the binding is mounted on this ski. This habit is taken over in the present text. Thus, the term "ski longitudinal direction" means along the orientation of the longitudinal axis of the ski. Similarly, "skiparallel" means aligned for an elongate object along the longitudinal axis of the ski. For a flat object, however, the term "ski-parallel" means aligned parallel to the sliding surface of the ski. Further, the term "ski direction" means a direction transverse to the ski longitudinal direction, which, however, need not be oriented exactly at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the ski. Their orientation may also be slightly different from a right angle. The term "ski center", in turn, means a center of the ski in the ski direction, while the term "ski manifest" does not mean that it can move in relation to the ski. It should also be noted that terms that do not contain the word "ski" refer to the reference system of (fictitious) skis. Thus, the terms "front", "rear", "top", "bottom" and "side" refer to "front", "rear", "top", "bottom" and "side" of the ski. Likewise, terms such as "horizontal" and "vertical" refer to the ski, with "horizontal" lying in a ski-parallel plane and "vertical" oriented perpendicular to this plane.
Eine Tourenskibindung des oben eingefĆ¼hrten, zweiten Typs ist in der
Um das Bindungsfrontteil von der Festhaltestellung in die Freigabestellung und zurĆ¼ck zu bringen, umfasst das in der
Bei einem Sturz kann der Skischuh auch ohne BetƤtigung des Ćffnungshebels aus dem Skibindungssystem gelƶst werden. Dazu wird der Skischuh zuerst aus dem Fersenautomat und danach aus dem Bindungsfrontteil gelƶst. Falls es sich um einen frontalen Sturz handelt, so wird der Skischuh vom Fersenautomaten nach oben freigegeben und im Bindungsfrontteil nach vorne gekippt. Wenn die nach vorne oder nach oben wirkende Kraft auf den Skischuh genĆ¼gend gross ist, so wird der Skischuh auch aus dem Bindungsfrontteil gerissen, indem die auf die beiden Winkelhebel wirkende Kraft Ć¼berwunden wird. Falls es sich hingegen um einen seitlichen Sturz handelt, wird der Skischuh vom Fersenautomat in seitliche Richtung freigegeben und um eine im Zehenbereich des Skischuhs liegende Vertikalachse gedreht. Dabei wird der Skischuh drehend aus dem Bindungsfrontteil gelƶst, indem die auf die Winkelhebel wirkende Kraft Ć¼berwunden wird.In the event of a fall, the ski boot can be detached from the ski binding system even without actuating the opening lever. For this purpose, the ski boot is first released from the heel counter and then from the binding front part. If it is a frontal fall, the ski boot is released from the heel unit up and tilted forward in the binding front. If the forward or upward force on the ski boot is sufficiently large, the ski boot is also torn out of the binding front part by overcoming the force acting on the two angle levers. If, on the other hand, it is a lateral fall, the ski boot is released laterally by the heel counter and around a toe area of the ski boot Vertical axis turned. In this case, the ski boot is rotationally released from the binding front part, by overcoming the force acting on the angle lever force.
Aufgrund dieser Lƶsungsmƶglichkeit des Bindungsfrontteils besteht das Problem, dass sich in der Aufstiegsstellung der Skischuh durch ein seitliches Drehmoment unbeabsichtigt aus dem Bindungsfrontteil lƶsen kann und damit gƤnzlich vom Ski gelƶst wird. Eine solche unbeabsichtigte Auslƶsung kann gemƤss der
Eine Weiterentwicklung des Bindungsfrontteils gemƤss der
Sowohl das Bindungsfrontteil gemƤss der
Einen etwas anderen Ansatz wird beim Frontautomaten, welcher in der
ZusƤtzlich zur Verschiebbarkeit in SkilƤngsrichtung ist der Schwenkhebel um eine vertikale Achse schwenkbar am Frontautomaten gelagert, wobei er aber von zwei Federn in eine skiparallele Ausrichtung gedrĆ¼ckt wird. Bei einer seitlich auf den Skischuh wirkenden Kraft kann daher der Ƥussere der beiden Winkelhebel nach aussen gedrĆ¼ckt werden, indem der Schwenkhebel gegen die Federkraft etwas seitlich geschwenkt wird, bis der Winkelhebel vom seitlichen Einschnitt im Schwenkhebel freigegeben wird. Gleichzeitig wird der innere Winkelhebel durch die Schwenkbewegung des Schwenkhebels dem Ƥusseren Winkelhebel folgend etwas nach innen geschwenkt. Dadurch ermƶglicht der Frontautomat gemƤss der
Auch beim Frontautomaten gemƤss der
Der Nachteil dieser bekannten Bindungsfrontteile und Frontautomaten ist, dass sie fĆ¼r den Skifahrer nur eine beschrƤnkte Sicherheit bieten. Wie bereits erwƤhnt, bieten die beiden Bindungsfrontteile gemƤss der
Aufgabe der Erfindung ist es, einen dem eingangs genannten technischen Gebiet zugehƶrenden Frontautomaten zu schaffen, welcher die Sicherheit fĆ¼r einen SkilƤufer erhƶht.The object of the invention is to provide a front of the above-mentioned technical area belonging to the front, which increases the safety of a skier.
Die Lƶsung der Aufgabe ist durch die Merkmale des Anspruchs 1 definiert. GemƤss der Erfindung umfasst der Frontautomat eine Zwangssteuerung, an welcher die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung gelagert sind, sodass die beiden Hebel innerhalb eines dynamischen Bereichs gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar sind und dabei die beiden Haltemittel gekoppelt im zweiten Abstand zueinander auf einem dynamischen Weg in Skiquerrichtung bewegt werden. Dabei kann es sich bei der gekoppelten Bewegung der beiden Hebel entlang des dynamischen Bereichs beispielsweise um eine Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel um die Achsen handeln. Es kann sich bei der gekoppelten Bewegung der beiden Hebel entlang des dynamischen Bereichs beispielsweise aber auch um eine lineare Bewegung entlang eines linearen Wegs handeln, welche einer Translationsbewegung der beiden Hebel entspricht, bei welcher die beiden Hebel gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung verschoben werden. Es kann sich bei der gekoppelten Bewegung der beiden Hebel entlang des dynamischen Bereichs beispielsweise aber auch um eine lineare Bewegung entlang eines linearen Wegs handeln, welche einer Kombination einer Translationsbewegung und einer Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel entspricht, bei welcher die beiden Hebel gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung verschoben und um die Achsen geschwenkt werden.The solution of the problem is defined by the features of
Der dynamische Bereich kann auf einer oder auf beiden Seiten durch einen Anschlag begrenzt sein, durch welchen wenigstens einer der beiden Hebel gestoppt und in seiner weiteren Bewegungsfreiheit gehindert wird. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass der dynamische Bereich auf einer oder auf beiden Seiten dadurch begrenzt ist, dass die beiden Hebel ab einer bestimmten Position nicht mehr gekoppelt, sondern entkoppelt bewegbar sind. SelbstverstƤndlich besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass der dynamische Bereich fĆ¼r einen der Hebel durch einen Anschlag begrenzt ist und fĆ¼r den anderen der Hebel dadurch begrenzt ist, dass er ab einer bestimmten Position entkoppelt bewegbar ist. Dabei kann die Begrenzungsart fĆ¼r die beiden Hebel auch abhƤngig von der Seite des dynamischen Bereichs sein. Das bedeutet, dass beispielsweise der dynamische Bereich auf einer ersten Seite fĆ¼r einen ersten der beiden Hebel durch einen Anschlag begrenzt ist und fĆ¼r einen zweiten der beiden Hebel dadurch begrenzt ist, dass er ab einer bestimmten Position entkoppelt bewegbar ist. Gleichzeitig kann der dynamische Bereich auf einer zweiten Seite fĆ¼r den ersten Hebel dadurch begrenzt sein, dass er ab einer bestimmten Position entkoppelt bewegbar ist, wƤhrend der dynamische Bereich auf der zweiten Seite fĆ¼r den zweiten Hebel durch einen Anschlag begrenzt ist.The dynamic range may be limited on one or both sides by a stop, by which at least one of the two levers is stopped and prevented in its further freedom of movement. However, there is also the possibility that the dynamic range on one or both sides is limited by the fact that the two levers are no longer coupled from a certain position, but can be moved decoupled. Of course, there is also the possibility that the dynamic range for one of the levers is limited by a stop and for the other, the lever is limited by the fact that it is decoupled from a certain position. The type of limitation for the two levers can also be dependent on the side of the dynamic range. This means that, for example, the dynamic range on a first side for a first of the two levers is limited by a stop and is limited for a second of the two levers in that it can be decoupled from a certain position. At the same time, the dynamic range on a second side for the first lever may be limited by being decoupled from a certain position, while the dynamic range on the second side is limited by a stop for the second lever.
Die Lƶsung hat den Vorteil, dass ein im Frontautomaten gehaltener Skischuh zusammen mit den beiden Haltemitteln in der Festhaltestellung auf dem dynamischen Weg in Skiquerrichtung bewegt werden kann. Durch diese Bewegung kann vom Frontautomaten Energie aufgenommen werden, ohne dass der Skischuh aus dem Frontautomaten gelƶst wird. Dies ist beim Skilaufen und gegebenenfalls bei einem Sturz vorteilhaft, da SchlƤge auf den Ski oder den Skischuh entstehen kƶnnen, bei welchen sich der Skischuh nicht vom Frontautomaten lƶsen sollte. Um eine StƤrke der aushaltbaren SchlƤge einzustellen, kann dabei die vom Frontautomaten aufnehmbare Energie vorgegeben werden, indem die LƤnge des dynamischen Wegs und/oder eine Widerstandskraft, welche fĆ¼r die Bewegung aufgebracht werden muss, angepasst werden. Entsprechend kann eine kontrollierte Sicherheitsauslƶsung vorgesehen werden, welche ausgelƶst wird, wenn die Energie eines Schlages die aufnehmbare Energie Ć¼berschreiten sollte.The solution has the advantage that a ski boot held in the front automat can be moved together with the two holding means in the arresting position on the dynamic path in the ski direction. This movement can be absorbed by the front automate energy without the ski boot is released from the front vending machine. This is advantageous when skiing and possibly in a fall, since blows to the ski or the ski boot may arise in which the ski boot should not detach from the front automat. In order to set a strength of the bearable strokes, the energy that can be absorbed by the front automat can be predetermined by adjusting the length of the dynamic path and / or a resistance force which has to be applied for the movement. Accordingly, a controlled Safety release are triggered, which is triggered when the energy of a shock should exceed the recordable energy.
In einer ersten, bevorzugten Variante sind in der Festhaltestellung die beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung um die Achsen schwenkbar. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die Bewegung der beiden Hebel durch die Achsen gefĆ¼hrt ist.In a first, preferred variant, the two levers are coupled within the dynamic range coupled in Skiquerrichtung about the axes in the locking position. This has the advantage that the movement of the two levers is guided by the axes.
In einer zweiten, bevorzugten Variante dazu sind die beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung entlang eines linearen Wegs bewegbar. Dabei kann es sich beispielsweise um eine Translationsbewegung der beiden Hebel handeln, bei welcher die beiden Hebel gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung verschoben werden. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass in der Festhaltestellung eine stabile Verbindung zwischen den beiden Hebeln vorgegeben werden kann, welche die beiden Haltemittel an den Hebeln im zweiten Abstand zueinander hƤlt. Es kann sich bei der Bewegung der beiden Hebel entlang des linearen Wegs aber beispielsweise auch um eine Kombination einer Translationsbewegung und einer Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel handeln, bei welcher die beiden Hebel gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung verschoben und um die Achsen geschwenkt werden. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass ein Verlauf des dynamischen Wegs der Haltemittel derart ausgebildet werden kann, dass KrƤfte, welche aus verschiedenen Richtungen auf einen im Frontautomaten gehaltener Skischuh wirken, vom Frontautomaten optimal aufgenommen werden kƶnnen.In a second, preferred variant, the two levers are coupled within the dynamic range in a direction of movement along a linear path. This may be, for example, a translational movement of the two levers, in which the two levers are moved in a coupled manner in the transverse direction. This has the advantage that in the holding position, a stable connection between the two levers can be specified, which keeps the two holding means on the levers in the second distance to each other. The movement of the two levers along the linear path may, for example, also be a combination of a translational movement and a pivotal movement of the two levers, in which the two levers are coupled in the transverse direction and pivoted about the axes. This has the advantage that a course of the dynamic path of the holding means can be designed such that forces which act from different directions on a ski boot held in the front automatic machine can be optimally absorbed by the front automatic machine.
In einer bevorzugten AusfĆ¼hrungsform umfasst der Frontautomat fĆ¼r eine Skibindung, insbesondere eine Tourenskibindung, zwei in SkilƤngsrichtung gesehen seitlich angeordnete, sich gegenĆ¼berliegende Hebel mit je einem Haltemittel zum Halten eines Skischuhs in einem Zehenbereich des Skischuhs. Dabei sind die beiden Hebel vorzugsweise je um eine Achse schwenkbar gelagert und die Haltemittel werden von den Hebeln bei einer Schwenkbewegung in eine Skiquerrichtung bewegt, wobei der Frontautomat vorzugsweise ein als Zwangssteuerung bezeichnetes Element umfasst und die beiden Hebel an dieser Zwangssteuerung sowie an einem anderen Element des Frontautomaten lagerbar sind. Vorzugsweise weist der Frontautomat eine Freigabestellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem ersten Abstand zueinander befinden. Weiter weist der Frontautomat bevorzugt eine Festhaltestellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden, welcher kleiner als der erste Abstand ist. Vorteilhafterweise sind dabei in der Festhaltestellung die beiden Hebel beweglich an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert, welche in der Festhaltestellung ebenfalls beweglich ist. Dabei sind die beiden Hebel vorzugsweise durch die bewegliche Zwangssteuerung innerhalb eines dynamischen Bereichs gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung schwenkbar, wobei die beiden Haltemittel gekoppelt im zweiten Abstand zueinander auf einem dynamischen Weg in Skiquerrichtung bewegt werden. Wie die Zwangssteuerung dabei bewegt wird, ist nicht vorgegeben. Es kann sich beispielsweise um eine lineare Bewegung oder um eine Schwenk-oder Drehbewegung handeln.In a preferred embodiment, the front automatic machine for a ski binding, in particular a touring ski binding, comprises two levers arranged laterally in the ski longitudinal direction, each with a holding means for holding a ski boot in a toe region of the ski boot. In this case, the two levers are preferably each pivotally mounted about an axis and the holding means are moved by the levers in a pivoting movement in a Skiquerrichtung, the front automaton preferably comprises a designated as a positive control element and the two levers on this positive control and on another element of the Front automats are storable. The front automatic machine preferably has a release position in which the two holding means are at a first distance from one another. Furthermore, the front automatic machine preferably has a holding position in which the two holding means are at a second distance from each other, which is smaller than the first distance. Advantageously, the two levers are movably mounted on the positive control in the holding position, which is also movable in the holding position. Here, the two levers are preferably coupled by the movable positive control within a dynamic range coupled in Skiquerrichtung, the two holding means are coupled coupled at a second distance to each other on a dynamic path in Skiquerrichtung be moved. How the forced control is moved is not specified. It may, for example, be a linear movement or a pivoting or rotating movement.
In einer weiteren, bevorzugten AusfĆ¼hrungsform umfasst der Frontautomat fĆ¼r eine Skibindung, insbesondere eine Tourenskibindung, zwei in SkilƤngsrichtung gesehen seitlich angeordnete, sich gegenĆ¼berliegende Hebel mit je einem Haltemittel zum Halten eines Skischuhs in einem Zehenbereich des Skischuhs. Dabei sind die beiden Hebel vorzugsweise je um eine Achse schwenkbar gelagert und die Haltemittel werden von den Hebeln bei einer Schwenkbewegung in eine Skiquerrichtung bewegt, wobei der Frontautomat vorzugsweise ein als Zwangssteuerung bezeichnetes Element umfasst und die Achsen an dieser Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind. Vorzugsweise weist der Frontautomat eine Freigabestellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem ersten Abstand zueinander befinden. Weiter weist der Frontautomat bevorzugt eine Festhaltestellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden, welcher kleiner als der erste Abstand ist. Vorteilhafterweise sind dabei die beiden Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert, welche in der Festhaltestellung beweglich ist. Dabei sind die beiden Hebel vorzugsweise durch die bewegliche Zwangssteuerung innerhalb eines dynamischen Bereichs gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar, wobei die beiden Haltemittel gekoppelt im zweiten Abstand zueinander auf einem dynamischen Weg in Skiquerrichtung bewegt werden. Wie die Zwangssteuerung dabei bewegt wird, ist nicht vorgegeben. Es kann sich beispielsweise um eine lineare Bewegung oder um eine Schwenk- oder Drehbewegung handeln.In a further, preferred embodiment, the front automatic machine for a ski binding, in particular a touring ski binding, comprises two levers arranged laterally in the longitudinal direction of the ski, each having a retaining means for holding a ski boot in a toe region of the ski boot. The two levers are preferably each pivotally mounted about an axis and the holding means are moved by the levers in a pivoting movement in a Skiquerrichtung, the front automaton preferably comprises a designated as a positive control element and the axes are mounted on this positive control. The front automatic machine preferably has a release position in which the two holding means are at a first distance from one another. Furthermore, the front automatic machine preferably has a holding position in which the two holding means are at a second distance from each other, which is smaller than the first distance. Advantageously, the two levers are mounted on the positive control, which is movable in the holding position. In this case, the two levers are preferably movable in the transverse direction, coupled by the movable positive control within a dynamic range, wherein the two holding means are coupled and moved at a second distance from each other on a dynamic path in the transverse direction. How the forced control is moved is not specified. It may, for example, be a linear movement or a pivoting or rotating movement.
Bevorzugte AusfĆ¼hrungsformen des Frontautomaten kƶnnen aber auch andersartig ausgebildet sein. Im Folgenden wird anhand von vorteilhaften Merkmalen gezeigt, wie solche andere bevorzugte AusfĆ¼hrungsformen ausgebildet sein kƶnnen. SelbstverstƤndlich kƶnnen aber auch die beiden oben genannten, bevorzugten AusfĆ¼hrungsformen eines oder mehrere dieser vorteilhaften Merkmale umfassen.However, preferred embodiments of the front automatic machine can also be configured differently. In the following it will be shown on the basis of advantageous features how such other preferred embodiments can be formed. Of course, however, the two above-mentioned, preferred embodiments may include one or more of these advantageous features.
Vorteilhafterweise sind die Achsen der Hebel in einer skiparallelen Ebene angeordnet. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die Achsen unterhalb der Haltemittel angeordnet werden kƶnnen, wodurch eine kompakte Bauweise des Frontautomaten erreicht wird. Bevorzugt sind die Achsen zudem im Wesentlichen skiparallel ausgerichtet, wobei aber Abweichungen von einer skiparallelen Ausrichtung von 10 Grad oder von 20 Grad vorgesehen sein kƶnnen. Vorzugsweise ist jedoch die seitliche Abweichung der Achsen von einer skiparallelen Ausrichtung weniger als 10 Grad. Falls die Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs schwenkbar sind und entsprechend der dynamische Weg der Haltemittel in einer Ebene senkrecht zur Achse des jeweiligen Hebels liegt, ist dadurch eine Ebene der dynamischen Wege der Haltemittel im Wesentlichen in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtet. Falls hingegen die beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs gekoppelt in Skiquerrichtung entlang eines linearen Wegs bewegbar sind, kann durch die Ausrichtung der Achsen bei einer Schwenkbewegung der Hebel um die Achsen eine FortfĆ¼hrung der Bewegung der Haltemittel in Skiquerrichtung erreicht werden. In beiden FƤllen ist diese Anordnung der Achsen vorteilhaft fĆ¼r den Fall, dass der Frontautomat eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung vorsieht. Bei einer solchen seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung verlƤuft eine Bewegung des Skischuhs im Wesentlichen in einer skiparallelen Ebene. Dabei kann die Bewegung des Skischuhs sowohl eine lineare Bewegung als auch eine Drehung um eine vertikale Achse des Skischuhs umfassen. Da die Ebene des dynamischen Wegs somit im Wesentlichen rechtwinklig zur Bewegungsebene des Skischuhs ausgerichtet ist, kann der dynamische Weg der Haltemittel bestmƶglich Bewegungen des Skischuhs aufnehmen, welche durch verschieden ausgerichtete, in Skiquerrichtung verlaufende Krafteinwirkungen verursacht werden. Entsprechend ist fĆ¼r verschiedene Krafteinwirkungen die vom Frontautomaten aufnehmbare Energie bestmƶglich vorgebbar. Durch Vorgabe der aufnehmbaren Energie kann wiederum eine kontrollierte, seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung ermƶglicht werden, welche bei einer Ćberschreitung der aufnehmbaren Energie eintritt.Advantageously, the axes of the levers are arranged in a plane parallel to the ski. This has the advantage that the axes can be arranged below the holding means, whereby a compact design of the front automatic is achieved. In addition, the axes are preferably oriented essentially in the same direction as a ski, although deviations from a parallel alignment of 10 degrees or 20 degrees may be provided. Preferably, however, the lateral deviation of the axes from a ski-parallel alignment is less than 10 degrees. If the levers are pivotable within the dynamic range and, accordingly, the dynamic path of the holding means lies in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the respective lever, thereby aligning a plane of the dynamic paths of the holding means substantially in the cross-machine direction. If, on the other hand, the two levers are coupled in the same direction along a linear path within the dynamic range, alignment of the axes with pivotal movement of the lever about the axes can continue the movement of the holding means in the transverse direction. In both cases, this arrangement of the axes is advantageous in the event that the front panel provides a lateral safety release. In such a lateral safety release, a movement of the ski boot essentially runs in a plane parallel to the ski. The movement of the ski boot may include both a linear movement and a rotation about a vertical axis of the ski boot. Since the plane of the dynamic path is thus oriented essentially perpendicular to the plane of movement of the ski boot, the dynamic path of the holding means can best accommodate movements of the ski boot, which are caused by differently oriented, in Skiquerrichtung forces. Correspondingly, the energy that can be absorbed by the front-end automaton can be predefined in the best possible manner for different forces. By specifying the absorbable energy, in turn, a controlled, lateral safety release can be made possible, which occurs when the absorbable energy is exceeded.
Alternativ dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Achsen anders ausgerichtet sind. Beispielsweise kƶnnen sie auch vertikal oder in einem beliebigen Winkel zur SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtet sein.Alternatively, there is also the possibility that the axes are aligned differently. For example, they can also be aligned vertically or at any angle to the ski longitudinal direction.
Vorteilhafterweise umfassen beide Hebel je auf einer der Skimitte zugewandten Seite eine Steuerbacke zum Zusammenwirken mit einem Skischuh. Bei diesen Steuerbacken kann es sich beispielsweise je um ein am entsprechenden Hebel angebrachtes, zur Skimitte hervorstehendes Element handeln. Die Steuerbacken haben den Vorteil, dass bei einer Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel ab einem gewissen Schwenkwinkel die Steuerbacke des in Bewegungsrichtung liegenden Hebels mit dem Skischuh zusammenwirken kann und dadurch das Haltemittel dieses Hebels vom Skischuh gelƶst werden kann. Entsprechend hat dies den Vorteil, dass der Vorgang einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung aus dem Frontautomaten vereinfacht werden kann. Das bedeutet, dass, falls der Frontautomat eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung vorsieht, der Bewegungsablauf des Skischuhs bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung kontinuierlicher wird und damit die Sicherheit fĆ¼r den SkilƤufer erhƶht wird. Falls die Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs um die Achsen schwenkbar sind, kƶnnen dabei die Steuerbacken bei einer Schwenkbewegung der Hebel bereits innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs mit dem Skischuh zusammenwirken. Falls hingegen die beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs entlang eines linearen Wegs bewegbar sind und beispielsweise wenigstens einer der beiden Hebel bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung um die entsprechende Achse schwenkbar ist, so kann der entsprechende Steuerbacken bei der Sicherheitsauslƶsung mit dem Skischuh zusammenwirken, wodurch der Skischuh einfacher aus dem Frontautomaten gelƶst werden kann.Advantageously, both levers each comprise a control jaw for interacting with a ski boot on a side facing the center of the ski. For example, these control jaws may each be an element attached to the corresponding lever and projecting towards the center of the ski. The control jaws have the advantage that at a pivoting movement of the two levers from a certain pivot angle, the control jaw lying in the direction of movement lever can interact with the ski boot and thereby the holding means of this lever can be released from the ski boot. Accordingly, this has the advantage that the process of a lateral safety release from the front automate can be simplified. This means that if the front of the vehicle is equipped with a lateral safety release, the movement of the ski boot becomes more continuous in the event of a lateral safety release, thus increasing the safety for the skier. If the levers are pivotable about the axes within the dynamic range, the control jaws can already interact with the ski boot in the event of a pivotal movement of the levers within the dynamic range. If, on the other hand, the two levers are movable within the dynamic range along a linear path and, for example, at least one of the two levers is pivotable about the corresponding axis in the event of a lateral safety release, then the corresponding control jaw can cooperate with the ski boot during the safety release, making the ski boot simpler can be solved from the front automat.
Als Variante dazu besteht auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Steuerbacken nicht als separates Element ausgebildet sind. Sie kƶnnen beispielsweise je einstĆ¼ckig zusammen mit dem entsprechenden Hebel hergestellt sein, oder aber die Hebel kƶnnen auch derart geformt sein, dass beispielsweise ein Bogen im Hebel die Funktion einer Steuerbacke Ć¼bernimmt. In dieser letzten Variante umfassen die Hebel einen steuerbackigartigen Bogen, welcher ebenfalls unter den Begriff Steuerbacke zu fassen ist.As a variant, there is also the possibility that the control jaws are not formed as a separate element. You can, for example, each be made in one piece with the corresponding lever, or the levers can also be shaped so that, for example, an arc in the lever takes over the function of a control jaw. In this last variant, the levers include a sterberbackigartigen bow, which is also under the term Steuerbacke.
Alternativ dazu kƶnnen die beiden Hebel aber auch keine auf der zur Skimitte gerichteten Seite der Hebel angeordnete Steuerbacke umfassen. Falls die Haltemittel beispielsweise derart ausgebildet sind, dass sie sich leicht vom Skischuh lƶsen, wenn die Hebel Ć¼ber einen bestimmten Winkel hinaus geschwenkt werden, so kann diese Alternative vorteilhaft sein, da dadurch die Konstruktion des Frontautomaten vereinfacht und seine Herstellung kostengĆ¼nstiger wird.Alternatively, however, the two levers can also not comprise a control jaw arranged on the side of the levers directed to the center of the ski. For example, if the holding means are designed to be easily detached from the ski boot when the levers are pivoted beyond a certain angle, this alternative may be advantageous since this simplifies the construction of the front automat and makes its manufacture more cost effective.
Bevorzugt ist die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung entlang eines Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar, wodurch die beiden Hebel gekoppelt innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs bewegbar sind. Falls die beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs entlang eines linearen Wegs bewegbar sind, sind die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung bevorzugt fest an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert, wodurch die beiden Hebel gekoppelt innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs bewegbar sind. Falls hingegen die beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs um die Achsen schwenkbar sind, ist die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung bevorzugt bei einer gekoppelten Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs der beiden Hebel entlang eines Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar. Wie die Zwangssteuerung in diesen beiden FƤllen genau bewegt wird, ist nicht vorgegeben. Es kann sich bei ihrer Bewegung beispielsweise um eine Bewegung in eine lineare Richtung, um eine Schwenk- oder Drehbewegung, oder um eine Kombination davon handeln. Falls es sich bei der Bewegung der Zwangssteuerung um eine Dreh- oder Schwenkbewegung handelt, kann der Zwangssteuerungsweg somit ein Drehwinkel sein. Falls es sich bei der Bewegung hingegen um eine Kombination aus linearer Richtung sowie Schwenk- oder Drehbewegung handelt, so kann der Zwangssteuerungsweg eine Kombination aus Drehwinkel und linearem Weg sein. Im Falle einer solchen Kombination besteht zudem beispielsweise die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung als gesamtes in einer kombinierten Bewegung bewegt wird. Es besteht beispielsweise aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass ein oder mehrere Elemente der Zwangssteuerung in eine lineare Richtung bewegt werden, wƤhrend ein oder mehrere weitere Elemente der Zwangssteuerung gedreht oder geschwenkt werden. Alle derartigen Bewegungen der Zwangssteuerung entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs haben den Vorteil, dass in der Festhaltestellung auf einfache Art und Weise eine gekoppelte Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel entlang des dynamischen Bereichs erreicht werden kann.Preferably, the positive control is movable in the holding position along a positive control path, whereby the two levers are coupled within the dynamic range movable. If the two levers are movable within the dynamic range along a linear path, the two levers are preferably fixedly mounted on the positive control in the detent position, whereby the two levers are coupled coupled within the dynamic range. If, however, the two levers are pivotable about the axes within the dynamic range, the positive control in the detent position is preferably movable in a coupled pivotal movement of the two levers within the dynamic range of the two levers along a positive control path. How the forced control is exactly moved in these two cases is not predetermined. Its movement may be, for example, a movement in a linear direction, a pivotal or rotational movement, or a combination thereof. If the movement of the positive control is a rotary or pivoting movement, the forced control path can thus be a rotation angle. If, on the other hand, the movement is a combination of a linear direction and a pivoting or rotating movement, then the forced-control path can be a combination of a rotation angle and a linear path. In the case of such a combination, for example, there is also the possibility that the priority control is moved as a whole in a combined movement. However, for example, there is also the possibility that one or more elements of the positive control are moved in a linear direction while one or more further elements of the positive control are rotated or pivoted. All such movements of the positive control along the positive control path have the advantage that in the holding position in a simple manner a coupled Pivoting movement of the two levers along the dynamic range can be achieved.
Falls es sich bei der Bewegung der Zwangssteuerung um eine Bewegung in eine lineare Richtung, um eine Schwenkbewegung oder um eine Kombination davon handelt, so sind die Bewegung und damit auch der Zwangssteuerungsweg vorzugsweise in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtet. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die Zwangssteuerung die gekoppelte Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel mitmachen kann, wodurch die Konstruktion des Frontautomaten vereinfacht wird.If the movement of the positive control is a movement in a linear direction, a pivotal movement or a combination thereof, then the movement and thus also the positive control path are preferably aligned in the cross-machine direction. This has the advantage that the positive control can join the coupled pivoting movement of the two levers, whereby the construction of the front automatic is simplified.
Als Alternative dazu besteht jedoch auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung nicht bewegbar, sondern skifest angeordnet ist.As an alternative, however, there is also the possibility that the positive control in the holding position is not movable, but is arranged skifest.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung bewegbar ist, so ist sie bei einer Abweichung von einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs vorzugsweise durch ein vorgespanntes, elastisches Element mit einer Kraft zur Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs drĆ¼ckbar. Dabei besteht auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass mehr als ein vorgespanntes, elastisches Element vorhanden ist. Ungeachtet der Anzahl elastischer Elemente hat dies den Vorteil, dass die Zwangssteuerung von dem oder den elastischen Elementen in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt wird, wenn keine andere Kraft auf die Zwangssteuerung wirkt. Dabei kƶnnen mit der Zwangssteuerung auch die beiden Hebel in eine Mitte des dynamischen Bereichs bewegt werden. Entsprechend kƶnnen die beiden Hebel unter Einwirkung einer einsetzenden, seitlichen Kraft ausgehend von dieser Mitte des dynamischen Bereichs sowohl in eine erste als auch in eine zweite Richtung entlang des dynamischen Bereichs bewegt werden, wobei sie bei Wegfall der seitlichen Kraft zurĆ¼ck zur Mitte des dynamischen Bereichs bewegt werden. Falls es somit beim Skilaufen zu einem seitlich gerichteten Schlag oder einer seitlich gerichteten Kraft auf den Skischuh oder den Ski kommt, kann die entsprechende Energie ohne eine Loslƶsung des Skischuhs vom Frontautomaten aufgenommen werden, egal von welcher Seite der Schlag oder die Kraft kommt.If the positive control is movable in the holding position, it is preferably pressed by a biased, elastic element with a force to the center of the positive control travel at a deviation from a center of the positive control travel. There is also the possibility that more than one prestressed, elastic element is present. Regardless of the number of elastic elements, this has the advantage that the constraint control is moved by the one or more elastic members to the center of the positive control travel when no other force is applied to the positive control. It can be moved with the positive control and the two levers in a center of the dynamic range. Accordingly, the two levers can be moved along the dynamic range in both first and second directions under the influence of an incipient lateral force starting from this center of the dynamic range, moving back to the center of the dynamic range when the lateral force ceases become. Thus, if skiing results in a sideways impact or a lateral force on the ski boot or ski, the corresponding energy can be absorbed by the front automat without disengaging the ski boot, regardless of which side the impact or force comes from.
Bei der erwƤhnten Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs und der erwƤhnten Mitte des dynamischen Bereichs kann es sich um die geometrische Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs bzw. des dynamischen Bereichs handeln. Es kann sich aber auch um eine Stelle im Zwangssteuerungsweg bzw. dynamischen Bereich handeln, welche nicht in der geometrischen Mitte liegt. Es besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass diese Mitten in einem kontinuierlichen Bereich des Zwangssteuerungswegs bzw. dynamischen Bereichs liegen. In diesem Fall sind die Mitten dadurch gegeben, dass die Zwangssteuerung bzw. die Hebel durch das oder die elastischen Elemente an diese Stelle im Zwangssteuerungsweg bzw. im dynamischen Bereich gedrĆ¼ckt werden. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Mitten in einem Knick im Zwangssteuerungsweg bzw. dynamischen Bereich liegen. Beispielsweise kann der Zwangssteuerungsweg v-fƶrmig sein und die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs kann in der Spitze des "v" liegen. In diesem Fall kann die Zwangssteuerung ausgehend von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs je nach Richtung der seitlichen Kraft oder des seitlichen Schlags entlang des einen oder entlang des anderen Arms des "v" bewegt werden. Beispielsweise kann sich die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs aber auch an einem Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs befinden. Dies kann insbesondere dann der Fall sein, wenn der Zwangssteuerungsweg entlang der SkilƤngsrichtung verlƤuft. Dann kann die Zwangssteuerung ausgehend von diesem Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs in SkilƤngsrichtung bewegbar sein, wobei die beiden Hebel aber in diesem Beispiel in der Festhaltestellung derart an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind, dass sie in Wirkrichtung der seitlichen Kraft oder des seitlichen Schlags schwenkbar sind, wƤhrend die Zwangssteuerung unabhƤngig von der Wirkrichtung der seitlichen Kraft in SkilƤngsrichtung bewegt wird.The mentioned center of the positive control path and the mentioned center of the dynamic range may be the geometric center of the Force control path or dynamic range. However, it can also be a position in the positive control path or dynamic range, which does not lie in the geometric center. There is a possibility that these centers are in a continuous range of the constraint path or dynamic range. In this case, the centers are given by the fact that the positive control or the lever are pressed by the one or more elastic elements to this point in the positive control path or in the dynamic range. But there is also the possibility that the centers are in a kink in the positive control path or dynamic range. For example, the positive control path may be V-shaped and the center of the positive control path may be in the top of the "v". In this case, the positive control may be moved from the center of the positive control path, depending on the direction of the lateral force or the lateral stroke, along one or along the other arm of the "v". For example, however, the center of the force control path may also be at one end of the force control path. This may be the case in particular when the positive control path runs along the ski longitudinal direction. The positive control can then be movable in the longitudinal direction of the ski starting from this end of the positive control travel, but in this example the two levers are mounted in the holding position on the positive control in such a way that they are pivotable in the effective direction of the lateral force or the lateral impact, while the positive control is moved independently of the effective direction of the lateral force in the ski longitudinal direction.
Als Variante dazu besteht auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass nicht die Zwangssteuerung, sondern einer oder beide Hebel durch ein oder mehrere vorgespannte, elastische Elemente in die Mitte des dynamischen Bereichs drĆ¼ckbar sind. Genauso kƶnnen aber auch beide Hebel je separat durch ein oder mehrere vorgespannte, elastische Elemente in die Mitte des dynamischen Bereichs drĆ¼ckbar sein. In beiden FƤllen kann eine entsprechende AusfĆ¼hrungsform besonders dann vorteilhaft sein, wenn die Zwangssteuerung selbst skifest angeordnet ist.As a variant of this, there is also the possibility that one or both levers can not be pressed into the middle of the dynamic range by one or more prestressed, elastic elements. In the same way, however, both levers can each be pressed into the middle of the dynamic range separately by one or more prestressed elastic elements. In both cases, a corresponding embodiment may be particularly advantageous if the positive control itself is arranged skifest.
In all diesen Varianten mit dem oder den vorgespannten, elastischen Elementen ist das vorgespannte, elastische Element vorzugsweise in der Skimitte in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtet. In einer ersten bevorzugten Variante davon drĆ¼ckt das vorgespannte, elastische Element in SkilƤngsrichtung auf die Zwangssteuerung, indem es einen seitlich gefĆ¼hrten und dadurch seitlich nicht verschiebbaren Kolben in eine horizontal angeordnete, im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmige Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung presst. Dabei kann die in Skiquerrichtung bewegbare Zwangssteuerung in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs gehalten werden, indem der Kolben in eine Spitze der v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtung gedrĆ¼ckt wird. Entsprechend kann die Zwangssteuerung ausgehend von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden, wobei der Kolben durch die entsprechende Flanke der im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtung in SkilƤngsrichtung entgegen der vorgespannten Kraft des elastischen Elements gedrĆ¼ckt wird. Dabei bewirkt die Ć¼ber den Kolben auf die Flanken der im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtungen wirkende, in SkilƤngsrichtung gerichtete Kraft des elastischen Elements eine rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung jeweils zurĆ¼ck in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt. Um den Reibungswiderstand zwischen der Zwangssteuerung und dem Kolben zu minimieren kann beispielsweise der Kolben an seiner Spitze ein Rollenlager aufweisen, welches auf den Flanken der im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung abrollen kann. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass der Kolben kein Rollenlager aufweist, sondern dass der Kolben und/oder die im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmige Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung eine spezielle Beschichtung aufweisen, welche den Reibungswiderstand reduziert. Weiter besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass der Kolben an seiner Spitze ein Rollenlager aufweist, welches auf einer speziellen Beschichtung der im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung abrollen kann. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass der Kolben kein solches Rollenlager umfasst und dass weder der Kolben noch die im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmige Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung eine spezielle Beschichtung aufweisen.In all these variants with the prestressed or elastic elements, the prestressed elastic element is preferably in the ski center in the ski longitudinal direction aligned. In a first preferred variant thereof, the prestressed, elastic element in the longitudinal direction of the ski presses on the positive control by pressing a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston into a horizontally arranged, substantially V-shaped indentation in the positive control. In this case, the movable in the Skiquerrichtung positive control can be maintained in the middle of the positive control travel by the piston is pressed into a tip of the v-shaped indentation. Accordingly, the positive control can be moved from the center of the positive control travel along the positive control travel, wherein the piston is pressed by the corresponding edge of the substantially v-shaped recess in the longitudinal direction of the ski against the biased force of the elastic member. The force acting on the flanks of the substantially V-shaped indentations, directed in the longitudinal direction of the ski force of the elastic element causes a restoring force, which drives the positive control respectively back into the middle of the positive control travel. In order to minimize the frictional resistance between the positive control and the piston, for example, the piston may have at its tip a roller bearing which can roll on the flanks of the substantially V-shaped indentation in the positive control. But there is also the possibility that the piston has no roller bearing, but that the piston and / or the substantially V-shaped indentation in the positive control have a special coating which reduces the frictional resistance. There is also the possibility that the piston has at its tip a roller bearing which can roll on a special coating of the substantially V-shaped indentation in the positive control. But there is also the possibility that the piston does not include such a roller bearing and that neither the piston nor the substantially V-shaped indentation in the positive control have a special coating.
Wenn ein vorgespanntes, elastisches Element vorhanden und in der Skimitte in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtet ist, so drĆ¼ckt in einer zweiten bevorzugten Variante das vorgespannte, elastische Element in SkilƤngsrichtung auf die Zwangssteuerung, indem es einen seitlich gefĆ¼hrten und dadurch seitlich nicht verschiebbaren Kolben gegen ein seitlich gefĆ¼hrtes und dadurch seitlich nicht verschiebbares Schwenkelement drĆ¼ckt, sodass ein erster Fuss des Schwenkelements in eine im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmige Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung gepresst wird. Dabei kann das Schwenkelement beispielsweise einen zweiten und dritten Fuss umfassen, welche je auf einer Seite der Skimitte am Schwenkelement angeordnet und zum Kolben hin ausgerichtet sind. So kann die in Skiquerrichtung bewegbare Zwangssteuerung in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs gehalten werden, indem der zweite und der dritte Fuss des Schwenkelements an einer Vorderseite des Kolbens abgestĆ¼tzt werden und indem der erste Fuss des Schwenkelements in eine Spitze der im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtung gedrĆ¼ckt wird. Entsprechend kann die Zwangssteuerung ausgehend von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden. Dabei wird der erste Fuss des Schwenkelements, welcher in die im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmige Einbuchtung gedrĆ¼ckt wird, mitbewegt. Wenn das Schwenkelement zwischen seinen drei FĆ¼ssen um eine Schwenkachse schwenkbar gelagert ist, so wird dadurch das Schwenkelement geschwenkt, sodass je nach Schwenkrichtung nur noch der zweite oder der dritte Fuss des Schwenkelements am Kolben abgestĆ¼tzt ist. Da dabei der entsprechende Fuss zur Skimitte hin bewegt wird, wird der Kolben gegen die Vorspannung des vorgespannten, elastischen Elements bewegt. Gleichzeitig drĆ¼ckt die Kraft, mit welcher der Kolben gegen das Schwenkelement gedrĆ¼ckt wird, das Schwenkelement zurĆ¼ck in seine mittige Ausrichtung, in welcher der zweite und der dritte Fuss des Schwenkelements an der Vorderseite des Kolbens abgestĆ¼tzt sind. Entsprechend wird dadurch die Zwangssteuerung zurĆ¼ck in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs getrieben. In einer derartigen Variante besteht zusƤtzlich die Mƶglichkeit, dass das Schwenkelement oder die Schwenkachse des Schwenkelements etwas in SkilƤngsrichtung verschiebbar gelagert ist.If a prestressed, elastic element is present and aligned in the ski center in the ski longitudinal direction, so presses in a second preferred variant, the biased elastic element in the longitudinal direction of the forced control by a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston against a laterally guided and thereby not laterally displaceable pivoting element presses, so that a first foot of the pivoting element in a substantially v-shaped Indentation in the forced control is pressed. In this case, the pivoting element may for example comprise a second and third foot, which are each arranged on one side of the ski center on the pivoting element and aligned towards the piston. Thus, the skid-movable positive control may be maintained in the center of the positive control path by supporting the second and third legs of the pivot member on a front side of the piston and pressing the first leg of the pivot member into a vertex of the substantially v-shaped recess , Accordingly, the priority control can be moved from the center of the force control path along the force control path. In this case, the first foot of the pivoting element, which is pressed into the substantially V-shaped indentation, moved along. If the pivoting element between its three feet is pivotally mounted about a pivot axis, so the pivoting element is thereby pivoted, so that depending on the pivoting direction, only the second or the third foot of the pivoting element is supported on the piston. As the corresponding foot is moved towards the center of the ski, the piston is moved against the bias of the prestressed elastic element. At the same time, the force with which the piston is pressed against the pivoting element pushes the pivoting element back into its central orientation, in which the second and the third foot of the pivoting element are supported on the front side of the piston. Accordingly, the forced control is thereby driven back to the middle of the positive control path. In such a variant, there is additionally the possibility that the pivoting element or the pivot axis of the pivoting element is mounted displaceably in the longitudinal direction of the ski.
Wenn ein vorgespanntes, elastisches Element vorhanden und in der Skimitte in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtet ist, so drĆ¼ckt in einer dritten bevorzugten Variante das vorgespannte, elastische Element in SkilƤngsrichtung auf die Zwangssteuerung, indem es einen seitlich gefĆ¼hrten und dadurch seitlich nicht verschiebbaren Kolben gegen ein schwenkbares Element der Zwangssteuerung presst. Dabei kann beispielsweise der Kolben in eine Spitze einer horizontal angeordneten, im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtung im Schwenkelement gedrĆ¼ckt werden, wodurch das schwenkbare Element im Wesentlichen in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtet wird und die in Skiquerrichtung bewegbare Zwangssteuerung in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs gehalten wird. In diesem Fall kann die Zwangssteuerung ausgehend von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden, indem das schwenkbare Element in die entsprechende Richtung geschwenkt wird. Dabei wird zusammen mit dem schwenkbaren Element auch die v-fƶrmige Einbuchtung geschwenkt, wodurch eine der beiden Flanken der v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtung gegen den Kolben gedrĆ¼ckt wird, welcher dadurch gegen die in SkilƤngsrichtung gerichtete Kraft des elastischen Elements bewegt wird. Dabei bewirkt die Ć¼ber den Kolben auf die Flanken der im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtung wirkende, in SkilƤngsrichtung gerichtete Kraft des elastischen Elements eine rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung jeweils zurĆ¼ck in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt.If a prestressed, elastic element is present and aligned in the ski center in the ski longitudinal direction, then presses in a third preferred variant, the biased elastic element in the longitudinal direction of the positive control by a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston against a pivoting element of the Forced control presses. In this case, for example, the piston can be pressed into a tip of a horizontally arranged, substantially v-shaped indentation in the pivoting element, whereby the pivotable element is aligned substantially in the longitudinal direction of the ski and the movable in Skiquerrichtung Forced control is maintained in the middle of the forced control path. In this case, the positive control can be moved from the center of the positive control travel along the positive control travel by pivoting the pivotable member in the corresponding direction. In this case, together with the pivotable element and the v-shaped recess is pivoted, whereby one of the two flanks of the V-shaped recess is pressed against the piston, which is thereby moved against the directed in the ski longitudinal direction of the elastic force. The force acting on the flanks of the substantially V-shaped indentation, directed in the longitudinal direction of the ski force of the elastic element causes a restoring force, which drives the positive control in each case back into the middle of the positive control travel.
Bei einem schwenkbaren Element der Zwangssteuerung besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass der Kolben beispielsweise an seinem vorderen Ende ein separates schwenkbares Element aufweist, welches gegen das schwenkbare Element der Zwangssteuerung gepresst wird. Bei einer geeigneten Anordnung der Schwenkachsen der beiden Schwenkelemente kann dadurch ebenfalls das schwenkbare Element der Zwangssteuerung im Wesentlichen in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtet werden und die in Skiquerrichtung bewegbare Zwangssteuerung in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs gehalten werden. In diesem Fall kann die Zwangssteuerung ebenfalls ausgehend von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden, indem das schwenkbare Element in die entsprechende Richtung geschwenkt wird. Dabei wird das separate schwenkbare Element am vorderen Ende des Kolbens mitgeschwenkt und der Kolben gegen die Kraft des elastischen Elements bewegt. Dies bewirkt eine rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung jeweils zurĆ¼ck in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt.In a pivotable element of the positive control but there is also the possibility that the piston has, for example, at its front end a separate pivotable element which is pressed against the pivotable element of the positive control. With a suitable arrangement of the pivot axes of the two pivoting elements, the pivotable element of the positive control can thereby also be aligned substantially in the longitudinal direction of the ski, and the skid-steerable positive control be kept in the middle of the forced-control path. In this case, the forcing control can also be moved from the center of the positive control path along the positive control path by pivoting the pivotable member in the corresponding direction. In this case, the separate pivotable element is pivoted at the front end of the piston and the piston is moved against the force of the elastic element. This causes a restoring force, which drives the positive control respectively back to the middle of the positive control path.
Wenn ein vorgespanntes, elastisches Element vorhanden und in der Skimitte in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtet ist, so drĆ¼ckt in einer vierten bevorzugten Variante das vorgespannte, elastische Element in SkilƤngsrichtung auf die Zwangssteuerung, indem es einen seitlich gefĆ¼hrten und dadurch seitlich nicht verschiebbaren Kolben gegen wenigstens einen schwenkbar gelagerten Hebel drĆ¼ckt, welcher dadurch seinerseits gegen ein schwenkbares Element der Zwangssteuerung gepresst wird. Dabei besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass beispielsweise zwei schwenkbar gelagerte Hebel vorhanden sind, welche derart in Skiquerrichtung gesehen nebeneinander angeordnet sind, dass das schwenkbare Element im Wesentlichen in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtet wird und die in Skiquerrichtung bewegbare Zwangssteuerung in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs gehalten wird. Um dies zu erreichen, kƶnnen die beiden schwenkbar gelagerten Hebel mit ihren Schwenkachsen beispielsweise derart angeordnet sein, dass eine Kraft des Kolbens Ć¼bersetzt auf das schwenkbare Element der Zwangssteuerung Ć¼bertragen wird. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die beiden schwenkbar gelagerten Hebel mit ihren Schwenkachsen derart angeordnet sind, dass eine Kraft des Kolbens untersetzt auf das schwenkbare Element der Zwangssteuerung Ć¼bertragen wird. UnabhƤngig von diesen Mƶglichkeiten kann in der vierten bevorzugten Variante die Zwangssteuerung ausgehend von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden, indem das schwenkbare Element in die entsprechende Richtung geschwenkt wird. Wenn nur ein schwenkbar gelagerter Hebel vorhanden ist, so kann dadurch dieser Hebel geschwenkt und der Kolben durch den Hebel gegen die rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft gedrĆ¼ckt werden. Wenn hingegen beispielsweise zwei schwenkbar gelagerte Hebel vorhanden sind, so kann beispielsweise durch die Schwenkbewegung des schwenkbaren Elements der Zwangssteuerung je nach Schwenkrichtung des schwenkbaren Elements der eine oder der andere schwenkbare Hebel geschwenkt werden, indem das schwenkbare Element aufgrund seiner Schwenkbewegung gegen diesen Hebel drĆ¼ckt. Dadurch kann der entsprechende schwenkbare Hebel gegen den Kolben gedrĆ¼ckt werden, wodurch dieser wiederum gegen die rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft bewegt wird.If a prestressed, elastic element is present and aligned in the ski center in the ski longitudinal direction, then presses in a fourth preferred variant, the biased elastic element in the longitudinal direction of the forced control by a laterally guided and thus laterally non-displaceable piston against at least one pivotally mounted Lever presses, which in turn is pressed against a pivotable element of the positive control. There is the Possibility that, for example, two pivotally mounted levers are present, which are arranged side by side in such a way seen in the cross-machine direction, that the pivotable element is aligned substantially in the longitudinal direction and the Skiquerrichtung movable positive control is held in the middle of the positive control travel. To achieve this, the two pivotally mounted levers can be arranged with their pivot axes, for example, in such a way that a force of the piston translated is transmitted to the pivotable element of the positive control. However, there is also the possibility that the two pivotally mounted levers are arranged with their pivot axes such that a force of the piston is underpinned transmitted to the pivotable element of the positive control. Independently of these possibilities, in the fourth preferred variant, the positive control can be moved starting from the middle of the positive control travel along the positive control travel by pivoting the pivotable element in the corresponding direction. If only one pivotally mounted lever is present, then this lever can be pivoted and the piston can be pressed by the lever against the restoring force. If, however, for example, two pivotally mounted levers are present, so can be pivoted, for example by the pivotal movement of the pivotal element of the positive control depending on the pivoting direction of the pivotable element one or the other pivotable lever by the pivotal element presses against this lever due to its pivotal movement. Thereby, the corresponding pivotable lever can be pressed against the piston, whereby this in turn is moved against the restoring force.
Wenn das vorgespannte, elastische Element in Skimitte in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtet ist, so besteht aber nebst diesen vier bevorzugten Varianten auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass das vorgespannte, elastische Element andersartig mit der Zwangssteuerung zusammenwirkt.If the prestressed, elastic element is aligned in the ski center in the ski longitudinal direction, then there is, in addition to these four preferred variants, also the possibility that the prestressed elastic element interacts differently with the positive control.
Zudem besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass das vorgespannte, elastische Element nicht in Skimitte in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtet ist. Beispielsweise kann es entlang dem Zwangssteuerungsweg bzw. entlang dem dynamischen Bereich ausgerichtet sein. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass es anders ausgerichtet ist und durch seine Vorspannung eine Kraft auf einen Umlenkmechanismus ausĆ¼bt, welcher die Wirkung der Kraft auf eine Richtung entlang dem Zwangssteuerungsweg bzw. entlang dem dynamischen Bereich umlenkt.In addition, there is the possibility that the prestressed, elastic element is not aligned in the ski center in the ski longitudinal direction. For example, it may be aligned along the positive control path or along the dynamic range. But there is also the possibility that it is different and through his Preload exerts a force on a deflection mechanism, which deflects the action of the force in a direction along the forced control path or along the dynamic range.
Bevorzugt weist der Frontautomat eine Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung auf. Zudem sind die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung vorteilhafterweise an ein Ende des dynamischen Bereichs bewegbar, wo derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher das Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg von der Skimitte wegbewegt ist, von der Zwangssteuerung freigebbar und vom anderen der beiden Hebel wegschwenkbar ist, wodurch der Frontautomat von der Festhaltestellung in die Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung bringbar ist. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung ermƶglicht wird. Da derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher in Bewegungsrichtung liegt, wegschwenkbar ist, wird auch das entsprechende Haltemittel weggeschwenkt, wodurch ein in der Festhaltestellung festgehaltener Skischuh in seiner Bewegungsrichtung freigegeben wird, sobald die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung an das entsprechende Ende des dynamischen Bereichs bewegt sind. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass bei einer Sicherheitsauslƶsung eine kontinuierliche Bewegung des Skischuhs von einer in der Festhaltestellung festgehaltenen Position zu einer Freigabe in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung gewƤhrleistet ist. Da, wie bereits vorgƤngig beschrieben, bei diesem Vorgang vom Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung eine vorgebbare Energie aufnehmbar ist, indem die beiden Hebel an ein Ende des dynamischen Bereichs bewegt werden, handelt es sich dabei um eine kontrollierbare, seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung.The front-mounted machine preferably has a safety release position. In addition, the two levers in the holding position are advantageously movable to one end of the dynamic range, where that of the two levers, which includes the holding means, which is moved away on the dynamic path from the ski center, releasable by the positive control and the other of the two lever pivoted away is, whereby the front panel of the holding position in the safety release position can be brought. This has the advantage that a lateral safety release is made possible. Since the one of the two levers, which is in the direction of movement, is pivoted away, the corresponding holding means is pivoted away, whereby a captured in the holding position ski boot is released in its direction of movement as soon as the two levers are moved in the holding position to the corresponding end of the dynamic range , This has the advantage that in the event of a safety release, a continuous movement of the ski boot is ensured from a position held in the holding position to a release in the safety release position. Since, as already described above, a predefinable energy can be absorbed by the front automatic machine in the holding position during this process by the two levers being moved to one end of the dynamic range, this is a controllable, lateral safety release.
Vorzugsweise sind in der Festhaltestellung die beiden Hebel je durch eine erste KulissenfĆ¼hrung und einen darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert. Weiter ist vorzugsweise in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung wenigstens einer der beiden Hebel freigegeben, indem der entsprechende erste Kulissenstein aus der entsprechenden ersten Zwangssteuerung gelƶst ist. Dabei besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass die ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen zumindest in der Festhaltestellung den jeweiligen ersten Kulissenstein beidseitig umschliessen und fĆ¼hren. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen den jeweiligen ersten Kulissenstein nicht beidseitig umschliessen und fĆ¼hren, sondern nur einseitig oder nur Ć¼ber einen Bereich beidseitig und ansonsten einseitig fĆ¼hren. Dabei bedeutet einseitig fĆ¼hren, dass beispielsweise der jeweilige erste Kulissenstein nur auf einer Seite die entsprechende erste KulissenfĆ¼hrung berĆ¼hrt. Dabei kann es sich bei den ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen beispielsweise um eine FlƤche handeln, auf welcher der jeweilige erste Kulissenstein abgestĆ¼tzt ist und entlang welcher der jeweilige erste Kulissenstein bewegbar ist. In diesem Fall kƶnnen die ersten Kulissensteine beispielsweise mittels eines elastischen Elements gegen die jeweilige erste KulissenfĆ¼hrung gedrĆ¼ckt werden. Entsprechend wird hier unabhƤngig davon, ob die ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen die ersten Kulissensteine beidseitig oder nur einseitig umschliessen, die Formulierung verwendet, wonach ein erster Kulissenstein in der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung gefĆ¼hrt ist. UnabhƤngig der konkreten Form und Ausbildung der ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen kƶnnen die ersten Kulissensteine auf verschiedenste Art und Weise ausgebildet sein. So kƶnnen sie beispielsweise zylinderfƶrmig ausgebildet sein. Sie kƶnnen aber beispielsweise auch zylinderfƶrmig ausgebildet sein und je eine sie umschliessende Rolle aufweisen, durch welche ihre Lagerung in der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung verbessert wird. Weiter besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die beiden ersten Kulissensteine beispielsweise klotzfƶrmig ausgebildet sind. Zudem besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass die beiden ersten Kulissensteine unterschiedlich geformte Bereiche umfassen. Beispielsweise kƶnnen sie je einen zylinderfƶrmigen Bereich sowie je einen oder mehrere weitere Bereiche aufweisen. Dabei kann beispielsweise je nach Bereich der ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung der zylinderfƶrmige Bereich oder ein anderer Bereich des jeweiligen ersten Kulissensteins mit der ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung zusammenwirken. Alle diese Arten von ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen mit darin gelagerten ersten Kulissensteinen haben den Vorteil, dass in der Festhaltestellung die beiden Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind und in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung wenigstens einer der beiden Hebel freigegeben ist und dadurch eine bestmƶgliche Bewegungsfreiheit aufweist.Preferably, in the holding position, the two levers are each supported by a first link guide and a first sliding block mounted therein on the positive control. Furthermore, at least one of the two levers is preferably released in the safety release position by releasing the corresponding first sliding block from the corresponding first positive control. In this case, there is the possibility that the first slide guides, at least in the holding position, enclose and guide the respective first slide block on both sides. But there is also the possibility that the first slide guides do not surround the respective first sliding block on both sides and lead, but only on one side or only on one area both sides and otherwise lead unilaterally. This means lead unilaterally that, for example, the respective first sliding block touches the corresponding first slide guide only on one side. By way of example, the first slide guides may be a surface on which the respective first slide block is supported and along which the respective first slide block is movable. In this case, the first sliding blocks can be pressed, for example by means of an elastic element against the respective first slotted guide. Accordingly, regardless of whether the first slotted guides surround the first sliding blocks on both sides or only on one side, the formulation is used here, according to which a first sliding block is guided in the corresponding first slotted guide. Regardless of the specific shape and design of the first slide guides, the first sliding blocks can be designed in various ways. For example, they may be cylindrical. But they can also be cylindrical, for example, and each have a role enclosing them, by which their storage in the corresponding first slide guide is improved. Furthermore, there is also the possibility that the first two sliding blocks are for example block-shaped. In addition, there is the possibility that the first two sliding blocks comprise differently shaped areas. For example, they can each have a cylindrical area and one or more further areas. In this case, for example, depending on the area of the first slide guide, the cylindrical area or another area of the respective first slide block may interact with the first slide guide. All these types of first slotted guides with first sliding blocks mounted therein have the advantage that in the holding position, the two levers are mounted on the positive control and in the safety release position at least one of the two levers is released and thereby has the best possible freedom of movement.
Als bevorzugte Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass beispielsweise einer oder beide Hebel in der Festhaltestellung und in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung je durch eine erste KulissenfĆ¼hrung und einen darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass sowohl in der Festhaltestellung als auch in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung die beiden Hebel an oder Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind. Dadurch wird insbesondere eine RĆ¼ckfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten von der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung in die Festhaltestellung erleichtert. Um dies zu erreichen, kƶnnen sowohl die ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen als auch die ersten Kulissensteine wie bereits beschrieben auf unterschiedlichste Art und Weise ausgebildet sein.As a preferred variant of this, however, there is also the possibility that, for example, one or both levers in the holding position and in the safety release position are each supported by a first sliding guide and a first sliding block mounted therein on the positive control. This has the advantage that the two levers are mounted on or forced control both in the holding position and in the safety release position. As a result, in particular a return of the front vending machine of the Safety release position facilitated in the arrest position. In order to achieve this, both the first slotted guides and the first sliding blocks can be designed in many different ways, as already described.
Anstelle dieser Varianten kƶnnen die beiden Hebel aber auch nicht durch eine erste KulissenfĆ¼hrung und einen darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sein. Beispielsweise kƶnnen die Achsen der Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sein, wƤhrend die Hebel an einem weiteren Element des Frontautomaten durch eine erste KulissenfĆ¼hrung und einen darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein gelagert sind. In diesem Fall kƶnnen die Hebel sowohl in der Festhaltestellung als auch in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung oder aber nur in der Festhaltestellung am weiteren Element gelagert sein.Instead of these variants, the two levers but also not be supported by a first link guide and a bearing therein first sliding block on the positive control. For example, the axes of the levers may be mounted on the positive control, while the levers are mounted on a further element of the front automatic machine by a first slotted guide and a first sliding block mounted therein. In this case, the levers can be stored both in the holding position and in the safety release position or only in the holding position on the other element.
Alternativ zu diesen Varianten kƶnnen die Hebel aber auch anders als durch erste KulissenfĆ¼hrungen und erste Kulissensteine an der Zwangssteuerung bzw. am weiteren Element gelagert sein. Eine solche Lagerung kann beispielsweise durch eine bewegliche Hebel- oder Kolbenverbindung ausgebildet sein.As an alternative to these variants, however, the levers can also be mounted differently than by first slide guides and first sliding blocks on the positive control or on the further element. Such storage may be formed for example by a movable lever or piston connection.
Falls erste KulissenfĆ¼hrungen und erste Kulissensteine vorhanden sind und falls die ersten Kulissensteine in der Festhaltestellung in der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung gelagert sind, weisen die ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen bevorzugt eine Geometrie auf, sodass in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher dasjenige Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg von der Skimitte wegbewegt ist, schwenkbar ist. Dabei kann der entsprechende Hebel in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung mit einer Bewegung des entsprechenden ersten Kulissensteins in der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung geschwenkt werden oder von der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung freigegeben sein. Falls der entsprechende erste Kulissenstein in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung in der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung geschwenkt werden kann, hat dies den Vorteil, dass sowohl in der Festhaltestellung als auch in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung die beiden Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung oder am weiteren Element der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind und dass somit eine RĆ¼ckfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten von der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung in die Festhaltestellung erleichtert ist. Falls hingegen der entsprechende erste Kulissenstein in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung von der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung freigegeben ist, hat dies den Vorteil, dass in der Festhaltestellung die beiden Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung oder am weiteren Element der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind und dass in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher dasjenige Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg von der Skimitte wegbewegt ist, ungehindert schwenkbar ist.If first slide guides and first sliding blocks are present and if the first sliding blocks are stored in the retaining position in the corresponding first slide guide, the first slide guides preferably have a geometry, so that in the safety release position that of the two levers, which includes the holding means on the dynamic path is moved away from the ski center, is pivotal. In this case, the corresponding lever can be pivoted in the safety release position with a movement of the corresponding first sliding block in the corresponding first link guide or released from the corresponding first link guide. If the corresponding first sliding block can be pivoted in the safety release position in the corresponding first slotted guide, this has the advantage that the two levers are mounted on the positive control or on the further element of the positive control both in the holding position and in the safety release position and thus a Return of the front automatic from the safety release position is facilitated in the holding position. If, however, the corresponding first sliding block in the safety release position of the This has the advantage that in the holding position, the two levers are mounted on the positive control or on the further element of the positive control and that in the safety release position that of the two levers, which includes that holding means, on the dynamic path of the ski center is moved away, is freely pivotable.
Falls erste KulissenfĆ¼hrungen vorhanden sind und eine solche Geometrie aufweisen, dass die ersten Kulissensteine in der Festhaltestellung und in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung in der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung gelagert sind, so sind die ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen vorzugsweise in einem Bereich verbreitert, in welchem in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung der entsprechende erste Kulissenstein in der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung bewegbar ist, wenn der entsprechende Hebel geschwenkt wird. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung schwenkbar ist, leichter bewegbar ist, da die entsprechende erste Kulissenstein in diesem Bereich der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung lose gefĆ¼hrt ist und es deshalb zwischen dem entsprechenden ersten Kulissenstein und der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung zu keinem oder nur sehr wenig Reibungswiderstand kommt.If first slotted guides are present and have such a geometry that the first sliding blocks are mounted in the locking position and in the safety release position in the corresponding first slotted guide, the first slotted guides are preferably widened in a region in which the corresponding first sliding block in the safety release position is movable in the corresponding first slide guide when the corresponding lever is pivoted. This has the advantage that the one of the two levers, which is pivotable in the safety release position, is easier to move, since the corresponding first sliding block is loosely guided in this area of the corresponding first sliding guide and therefore between the corresponding first sliding block and the corresponding first sliding guide there is no or very little frictional resistance.
UnabhƤngig davon, ob die ersten Kulissensteine nur in der Festhaltestellung oder sowohl in der Festhaltestellung als auch in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung in der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung gelagert sind, weisen die ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen zudem bevorzugt eine Ecke in ihrer Form auf, um welche der entsprechende erste Kulissenstein bewegt wird, wenn der entsprechende Hebel bei einem Ćbergang von der Festhaltestellung zur Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung freigegeben wird. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass der Hebel bei einer Sicherheitsauslƶsung sofort freigegeben wird und somit der Ćbergang von der Festhaltestellung in die Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung rasch erfolgt.Regardless of whether the first sliding blocks are stored only in the holding position or both in the holding position and in the safety release position in the corresponding first slide guide, the first slide guides also preferably have a corner in shape around which the corresponding first sliding block is moved when the corresponding lever is released during a transition from the holding position to the safety release position. This has the advantage that the lever is released immediately in a safety release and thus the transition from the holding position to the safety release position is carried out quickly.
Vorteilhafterweise weisen die ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen eine Geometrie auf, sodass in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher dasjenige Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg zur Skimitte hin bewegt ist, fixiert ist. Dies kann beispielsweise dadurch erreicht werden, dass der entsprechende erste Kulissenstein an einem Ende der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung anstƶsst. Dies kann aber auch dadurch erreicht werden, dass der entsprechende Hebel derart von der ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung gefĆ¼hrt ist, dass er an einem anderen Anschlag anstƶsst und dadurch an seiner Weiterbewegung gehindert ist. Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung entlang eines Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist, kann dies aber beispielsweise auch dadurch erreicht werden, dass in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung eine Weiterbewegung der Zwangssteuerung blockiert wird, wodurch auch eine Weiterbewegung des entsprechenden Hebels unterbunden wird. Dazu kann die Weiterbewegung der Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise durch einen Anschlag erfolgen. Diese drei Varianten haben den Vorteil, dass in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung eine freie Bewegung desjenigen der beiden Hebel, welcher dasjenige Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg zur Skimitte hin bewegt ist, verhindert wird. Dadurch kann bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung eine kontrollierte Freigabe des Skischuhs erreicht werden.Advantageously, the first slide guides on a geometry, so that in the safety release position that of the two levers, which includes the holding means which is moved on the dynamic path to the ski center, is fixed. This can be achieved, for example, in that the corresponding first sliding block abuts at one end of the corresponding first sliding guide. But this can also be be achieved in that the corresponding lever is guided in such a way by the first link guide that it abuts on another stop and is thereby prevented from further movement. If the positive control in the holding position along a positive control travel is movable, but this can also be achieved, for example, that in the safety release position further movement of the positive control is blocked, whereby a further movement of the corresponding lever is prevented. For this purpose, the further movement of the forced control can be done for example by a stop. These three variants have the advantage that in the safety release position a free movement of that of the two levers, which comprises the holding means which is moved on the dynamic path to the center of the ski, is prevented. As a result, a controlled release of the ski boot can be achieved with a lateral safety release.
Als Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen eine Geometrie aufweisen, sodass in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher dasjenige Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg zur Skimitte hin bewegt ist, innerhalb eines limitierten Bereichs schwenkbar ist, wƤhrend der andere Hebel frei schwenkbar ist. Auch dadurch kann bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung eine kontrollierte Freigabe des Skischuhs erreicht werden.As a variant of this, however, there is also the possibility that the first slide guides have a geometry, so that in the safety release position that of the two levers, which comprises the holding means which is moved on the dynamic path to the ski center, is pivotable within a limited range, while the other lever is freely pivotable. Also, a controlled release of the ski boot can be achieved with a lateral safety release.
Alternativ dazu kƶnnen die beiden Hebel in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung aber auch durch die Geometrie der ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen gekoppelt schwenkbar sein, wobei aber derjenige der beiden Hebel, welcher dasjenige Haltemittel umfasst, das auf dem dynamischen Weg von der Skimitte wegbewegt ist, proportional stƤrker schwenkbar als der andere Hebel ist.Alternatively, the two levers in the safety release position but also coupled by the geometry of the first link guides be pivotable, but that of the two levers, which includes the holding means which is moved away on the dynamic path from the ski center, proportionally more pivotal than the other Lever is.
Vorzugsweise ist die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung skifest angeordnet. Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist, kann dazu die Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise durch einen Anschlag an einer Weiterbewegung Ć¼ber ein Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs hinaus gehindert werden. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass einer der beiden Hebel in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung durch einen Anschlag an einer Weiterbewegung gehindert wird und durch seine Lagerung an der Zwangssteuerung die Zwangssteuerung an einer Weiterbewegung hindert. Falls die beiden Hebel durch eine erste KulissenfĆ¼hrung und einen ersten Kulissenstein an der Zwangssteuerung oder am weiteren Element des Frontautomaten gelagert sind, kann aber auch durch eine Geometrie der ersten Kulissensteuerung erreicht werden, dass die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung skifest angeordnet ist.The positive control is preferably arranged in the safety release position. If the positive control is movable in the holding position along the forced control path, the positive control can be prevented, for example, by an attack on a further movement beyond one end of the positive control travel. But there is also the possibility that one of the two levers in the safety release position is prevented by a stop on a further movement and by its storage on the forced control to the forced control hinders further movement. If the two levers are mounted by a first link guide and a first sliding block on the positive control or on the further element of the front vending machine, but can also be achieved by a geometry of the first slide control that the positive control is arranged in the safety release position skifest.
Alternativ dazu kann die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung aber auch beweglich sein.Alternatively, the positive control in the safety release position but also be mobile.
Wenn die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung bewegbar ist und der Frontautomat ein in der Skimitte in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtetes, vorgespanntes, elastische Element umfasst sowie die Zwangssteuerung eine im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmige Einbuchtung aufweist, so sind vorteilhafterweise in Ƥusseren Bereichen der beiden Flanken der v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtung Mulden angeordnet. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass je nach AusfĆ¼hrungsform beispielsweise ein an der Spitze eines vom vorgespannten, elastischen Element mit einer Kraft beaufschlagten Kolbens angeordnetes Rollenlager mit einer dieser Mulden zusammenwirken kann, wenn sich die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung befindet. In einer anderen AusfĆ¼hrungsform kann dadurch beispielsweise ein erster Fuss eines Schwenkelements mit einer dieser Mulden zusammenwirken, wenn sich die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung befindet. In beiden FƤllen haben dabei die Mulden den Vorteil, dass die rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft, welche durch den Kolben oder durch das Schwenkelement auf die Zwangssteuerung wirkt und diese zu einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt, in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung minimiert oder ganz aufgehoben wird. Dabei spielt es keine Rolle, ob die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung skifest angeordnet ist oder aber bewegbar ist. Durch die Minimierung bzw. Aufhebung der rĆ¼cktreibenden Kraft kƶnnen die Mulden jedoch eine skifeste Anordnung der Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung unterstĆ¼tzen.If the positive control is movable in the holding position and the front automatic comprises a biased in the ski center in the ski longitudinal direction, biased elastic element and the positive control has a substantially V-shaped recess, so are advantageously in outer regions of the two flanks of the V-shaped recess Arranged hollows. This has the advantage that, depending on the embodiment, for example, a roller bearing arranged at the tip of a piston acted upon by the prestressed elastic element with a force can interact with one of these hollows when the positive control is in the safety release position. In another embodiment, for example, a first foot of a pivoting element can thereby interact with one of these troughs when the positive control is in the safety release position. In both cases, the troughs have the advantage that the restoring force, which acts on the positive control by the piston or by the pivoting element and drives it to a center of the positive control travel, is minimized or completely eliminated in the safety release position. It does not matter if the positive control is arranged in the safety release position or is movable. However, by minimizing or eliminating the restoring force, the troughs can aid in the most preclusive control of the positive control in the safety release position.
Als Variante dazu besteht auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass an einer Vorderseite des Kolbens zwei Mulden angeordnet sind. Dies ist insbesondere dann vorteilhaft, wenn die rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung zu einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt, durch ein Schwenkelement Ć¼bertragen wird. In diesem Fall kann der zweite bzw. der dritte Fuss des Schwenkelements mit einer dieser Mulden zusammenwirken, wenn sich die Zwangssteuerung in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung befindet. Diese Variante hat ebenfalls den Vorteil, dass die rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung zu einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt, in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung minimiert oder ganz aufgehoben wird.As a variant, there is also the possibility that two troughs are arranged on a front side of the piston. This is particularly advantageous when the restoring force, which drives the positive control to a center of the positive control travel, is transmitted by a pivoting element. In this case, the second or the third foot of the pivoting element can cooperate with one of these troughs, if the priority control is in the safety release position. This variant also has the advantage that the restoring force, which drives the positive control to a center of the positive control path, is minimized or completely eliminated in the safety release position.
Alternativ dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass weder in Ƥusseren Bereichen der beiden Flanken der im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtung in der Zwangssteuerung noch in der Vorderseite des Kolbens zwei Mulden angeordnet sind. Eine solche alternative AusfĆ¼hrungsform kann beispielsweise vorteilhaft sein, wenn die rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung zu einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt, in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung auf andere Art und Weise minimiert oder ganz aufgehoben wird. Falls die Zwangssteuerung ein schwenkbares Element umfasst, in welchem die im Wesentlichen v-fƶrmige Einbuchtung angeordnet ist, kann dies beispielsweise durch ein entsprechendes Zusammenwirken des schwenkbaren Elements mit der restlichen Zwangssteuerung erreicht werden.Alternatively, however, there is also the possibility that two hollows are not arranged either in outer regions of the two flanks of the substantially V-shaped indentation in the positive control or in the front of the piston. Such an alternative embodiment may be advantageous, for example, if the restoring force that drives the positive control to a center of the positive control travel is otherwise minimized or eliminated in the safety release position. If the positive control comprises a pivotable element, in which the substantially V-shaped recess is arranged, this can be achieved, for example, by a corresponding cooperation of the pivotable element with the remaining positive control.
Bevorzugt sind die beiden Hebel in der Freigabestellung an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert, sodass sich die Haltemittel der beiden Hebel im ersten Abstand zueinander befinden. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die beiden Hebel und somit der Abstand der beiden Haltemittel in der Freigabestellung durch die Zwangssteuerung kontrollierbar sind.Preferably, the two levers are mounted in the release position on the positive control, so that the holding means of the two levers are at the first distance from each other. This has the advantage that the two levers and thus the distance of the two holding means in the release position can be controlled by the positive control.
Alternativ dazu kƶnnen die beiden Hebel in der Freigabestellung auch von der Zwangssteuerung gelƶst sein. Dabei sollten aber beide Hebel bei einer ĆberfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung jeweils an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert werden kƶnnen, wobei bei dieser ĆberfĆ¼hrung auch der Abstand der beiden Haltemittel vom ersten Abstand zum zweiten Abstand vermindert werden sollte. Dies kann beispielsweise dadurch umgesetzt werden, dass die beiden Hebel in der Freigabestellung an einem variablen Abstandhalter gelagert sind. Bei der ĆberfĆ¼hrung von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung kann durch diesen variablen Abstandhalter der Abstand der beiden Haltemittel auf den zweiten Abstand vermindert werden und die beiden Hebel kƶnnen an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert werden. Dabei kƶnnen die Hebel vom variablen Abstandhalter gelƶst werden oder aber am variablen Abstandhalter gelagert bleiben. Wenn der Frontautomat von der Festhaltestellung zurĆ¼ck in die Freigabestellung gebracht wird, sollten umgekehrt die beiden Hebel von der Zwangssteuerung gelƶst werden kƶnnen und der Abstand zwischen den beiden Haltemitteln sollte durch den variablen Abstandhalter auf den ersten Abstand erweitert werden kƶnnen. Falls die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung nicht am variablen Abstandhalter gelagert sind, so sollten sie dazu zuerst am variablen Abstandhalter gelagert werden kƶnnen. Diese Alternative hat den Vorteil, dass der Abstand zwischen den beiden Haltemittein nicht durch die Zwangssteuerung geƤndert wird, wodurch die Zwangssteuerung stabiler konstruiert werden kann und entsprechend grƶssere KrƤfte aushalten kann.Alternatively, the two levers may also be released from the positive control in the release position. But both levers should be stored at a transfer of the front vending machine from the release position in the holding position in each case on the positive control, in this transfer, the distance between the two holding means should be reduced from the first distance to the second distance. This can be implemented, for example, in that the two levers are mounted in the release position on a variable spacer. When transferring from the release position to the retaining position, the distance between the two retaining means can be reduced to the second distance and the two levers can be stored on the positive control by this variable spacer. The levers can be loosened from the variable spacer or remain supported on the variable spacer. When the front panel returns from the detention position vice versa, the two levers should be released from the positive control and the distance between the two holding means should be extended by the variable spacer to the first distance. If the two levers in the holding position are not mounted on the variable spacer, they should first be able to be stored on the variable spacer. This alternative has the advantage that the distance between the two Haltemittein is not changed by the forced control, whereby the positive control can be stably constructed and can withstand correspondingly larger forces.
Vorteilhafterweise umfasst die Zwangssteuerung ein Steuerelement, an welchem die beiden Hebel gelagert sind, wobei das Steuerelement derart bewegbar ist, dass die beiden Hebel in der Freigabestellung auseinander bewegt sind und sich die Haltemittel im ersten Abstand zueinander befinden und dass die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung zusammenbewegt sind und sich die Haltemittel im zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden. UnabhƤngig davon, ob die beiden Hebel dabei direkt am Steuerelement oder indirekt Ć¼ber ein, zwei oder mehr als zwei weitere Elemente am Steuerelement gelagert sind, hat dies den Vorteil, dass durch eine Bewegung des Steuerelements die Haltemittel in der Freigabestellung in den ersten Abstand und in der Festhaltestellung in den zweiten Abstand zueinander gebracht werden kƶnnen.Advantageously, the positive control comprises a control element on which the two levers are mounted, wherein the control element is movable such that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means are at the first distance from each other and that the two levers move together in the arresting position are and the holding means are at the second distance to each other. Regardless of whether the two levers are mounted directly on the control or indirectly via one, two or more than two further elements on the control, this has the advantage that by a movement of the control, the holding means in the release position in the first distance and in the holding position can be brought into the second distance to each other.
In einer bevorzugten Variante dazu umfasst die Zwangssteuerung hingegen ein Steuerelement, wobei durch das Steuerelement die beiden Hebel bei einer ĆberfĆ¼hrung in die Festhaltestellung zusammenbewegt werden und sich die Haltemittel im zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden. Dabei besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass bei einer ĆberfĆ¼hrung in die Freigabestellung die beiden Hebel durch ein weiteres Element des Frontsystems derart relativ zueinander bewegbar sind, dass die beiden Hebel auseinander bewegt werden und sich die Haltemittel im ersten Abstand zueinander befinden. UnabhƤngig davon, ob die beiden Hebel dabei direkt am Steuerelement oder indirekt Ć¼ber ein, zwei oder mehr als zwei weitere Elemente am Steuerelement gelagert sind, hat dies den Vorteil, dass die ĆberfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten von der Freigabestellung zur Festhaltestellung durch die Zwangssteuerung erreichbar ist, wƤhrend die ĆberfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten von der Festhaltestellung in die Freigabestellung durch ein von der Zwangssteuerung unabhƤngiges Element erfolgt.In contrast, in a preferred variant, the positive control comprises a control element, wherein the two levers are moved together by the control element in a transfer to the holding position and the holding means are at a second distance from each other. There is the possibility that when transferred to the release position, the two levers are movable relative to each other by a further element of the front system such that the two levers are moved apart and the holding means are at the first distance from each other. Regardless of whether the two levers are stored directly on the control or indirectly via one, two or more than two other elements on the control, this has the advantage that the transfer of the front vending machine from the release position to the holding position by the forced control is reached while the transfer of the front automaton of the Locking position in the release position by an independent of the positive control element takes place.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung ein Steuerelement umfasst und falls die beiden Hebel je durch eine erste KulissenfĆ¼hrung und einen darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sind, so sind die beiden Hebel vorteilhafterweise je durch die erste KulissenfĆ¼hrung und den darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein am Steuerelement gelagert. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die Zwangssteuerung einfach und entsprechend kompakt konstruiert werden kann. Als Variante dazu bestehen aber auch bevorzugte Mƶglichkeiten, bei welchen die beiden Hebel nicht je durch die erste KulissenfĆ¼hrung und den darin gelagerten ersten Kulissenstein am Steuerelement gelagert sind.If the positive control comprises a control and if the two levers are each supported by a first link guide and a first sliding block mounted therein on the positive control, the two levers are advantageously each supported by the first link guide and the first sliding block mounted therein on the control. This has the advantage that the positive control can be constructed easily and correspondingly compact. As a variant to but there are also preferred ways in which the two levers are not ever supported by the first link guide and the first sliding block mounted therein on the control.
In einer bevorzugten Variante dazu umfasst die Zwangssteuerung anstelle des Steuerelements zwei Elemente, wobei einer der beiden Hebel an einem ersten Element und der andere der beiden Hebel an einem zweiten Element gelagert ist, und wobei das erste und das zweite Element derart relativ zueinander bewegbar sind, dass die beiden Hebel in der Freigabestellung auseinanderbewegt sind und sich die Haltemittel im ersten Abstand zueinander befinden und dass die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung zusammenbewegt sind und sich die Haltemittel im zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden. Dies kann beispielsweise dadurch umgesetzt sein, dass die beiden Elemente der Zwangssteuerung durch eine Kolbenverbindung oder durch eine Schraubverbindung miteinander verbunden sind. Die beiden Elemente kƶnnen aber beispielsweise auch durch eine Schwenkverbindung miteinander verbunden sein, wobei die Haltemittel durch eine Schwenkbewegung der beiden Elemente auseinanderbewegt bzw. zusammenbewegt werden.In a preferred variant, the positive control comprises two elements instead of the control element, one of the two levers being mounted on a first element and the other of the two levers being mounted on a second element, and the first and the second element being movable relative to one another in this way, that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means are at the first distance from each other and that the two levers are moved together in the holding position and the holding means are at the second distance from each other. This can be implemented, for example, in that the two elements of the positive control are connected to one another by a piston connection or by a screw connection. However, the two elements can also be connected to each other, for example, by a pivoting connection, wherein the holding means are moved apart or moved together by a pivoting movement of the two elements.
In einer bevorzugten Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung anstelle der zwei Elemente das oben erwƤhnte Steuerelement umfasst.In a preferred variant, however, there is also the possibility that the positive control instead of the two elements comprises the above-mentioned control.
In einer weiteren bevorzugten Variante umfasst die Zwangssteuerung zusƤtzlich zu den beiden Elementen das Steuerelement als drittes Element, wobei durch das dritte Element das erste und das zweite Element derart relativ zueinander bewegbar sind, dass die beiden Hebel in der Freigabestellung auseinanderbewegt sind und sich die Haltemittel im ersten Abstand zueinander befinden und dass die beiden Hebel in der Festhaltestellung zusammenbewegt sind und sich die Haltemittel im zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die ĆberfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten von der Freigabestellung zur Festhaltestellung und zurĆ¼ck durch die Zwangssteuerung erreichbar ist.In a further preferred variant, the positive control comprises, in addition to the two elements, the control as a third element, wherein the third element, the first and the second element are relatively movable relative to each other, that the two levers are moved apart in the release position and the holding means in the first Are spaced apart and that the two levers are moved together in the holding position and the holding means are at the second distance from each other. This has the advantage that the transfer of the front automatic from the release position to the holding position and back by the forced control is reached.
In einer weiteren bevorzugten Variante umfasst die Zwangssteuerung hingegen zusƤtzlich zu den beiden Elementen das Steuerelement als drittes Element, wobei durch das dritte Element das erste und das zweite Element derart relativ zueinander bewegbar sind, dass die beiden Hebel bei einer ĆberfĆ¼hrung in die Festhaltestellung zusammenbewegt werden und sich die Haltemittel im zweiten Abstand zueinander befinden. Dabei besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass bei einer ĆberfĆ¼hrung in die Freigabestellung das erste und das zweite Element durch ein weiteres Element des Frontsystems derart relativ zueinander bewegbar sind, dass die beiden Hebel auseinanderbewegt werden und sich die Haltemittel im ersten Abstand zueinander befinden. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass die ĆberfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten von der Freigabestellung zur Festhaltestellung durch die Zwangssteuerung erreichbar ist, wƤhrend die ĆberfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten von der Festhaltestellung in die Freigabestellung durch ein von der Zwangssteuerung unabhƤngiges Element erfolgt.In a further preferred variant, however, the positive control comprises, in addition to the two elements, the control as a third element, wherein the third element, the first and the second element are relatively movable relative to each other, that the two levers are moved together in a transfer to the holding position and the holding means are at the second distance from each other. There is the possibility that when transferred to the release position, the first and the second element by a further element of the front system are movable relative to each other so that the two levers are moved apart and the holding means are at the first distance from each other. This has the advantage that the transfer of the front vending machine from the release position to the holding position is achieved by the forced control, while the transfer of the front vending machine from the holding position to the release position by an independent of the positive control element.
Alternativ dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung ein drittes Element umfasst, welches eine andere Funktion als das Steuerelement erfĆ¼llt, oder dass die Zwangssteuerung kein drittes Element umfasst.Alternatively, however, there is also the possibility that the positive control comprises a third element, which fulfills a function other than the control, or that the positive control comprises no third element.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung ein Steuerelement ohne die zwei oben erwƤhnten Elemente oder aber zusƤtzlich zu den zwei oben erwƤhnten Elementen ein Steuerelement als drittes Element umfasst und falls die Zwangssteuerung bei einer Abweichung von einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs durch ein vorgespanntes elastisches Element mit einer Kraft zur Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs drĆ¼ckbar ist, so ist unabhƤngig von den vorhergenannten, bevorzugten Varianten das Steuerelement vorzugsweise derart ausgebildet, dass die rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt, Ć¼ber dieses Steuerelement auf die Zwangssteuerung Ć¼bertragbar ist. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass das Steuerelement mehrere Funktionen erfĆ¼llt und somit der Frontautomat aus weniger Elementen konstruiert werden kann, was eine leichtere Konstruktionsweise ermƶglicht.If the positive control comprises a control element without the two elements mentioned above or in addition to the two elements mentioned above, a control element as the third element and if the forced control is deviated from a center of the positive control path by a prestressed elastic element having a force to the center of the positive control path can be pressed, so regardless of the aforementioned preferred variants, the control is preferably designed such that the restoring force, which drives the positive control in the middle of the positive control travel, via this control on the positive control is transferable. This has the advantage that the control fulfills several functions and thus the front-end can be constructed of fewer elements, allowing for a lighter construction.
Alternativ dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass, falls die Zwangssteuerung bei einer Abweichung von einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs durch ein vorgespanntes elastisches Element mit einer Kraft zur Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs drĆ¼ckbar ist, die rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft, welche die Zwangssteuerung in die Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs treibt, andersartig auf die Zwangssteuerung Ć¼bertragbar ist.Alternatively, however, there is also the possibility that if the positive control is depressible at a deviation from a center of the positive control path by a biased elastic element with a force to the center of the positive control travel, the restoring force, which drives the positive control in the middle of the positive control travel, differently transferable to the forced control.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung ein Steuerelement ohne die zwei oben erwƤhnten Elemente oder aber zusƤtzlich zu den zwei oben erwƤhnten Elementen ein Steuerelement als drittes Element umfasst, so ist dieses Steuerelement in einer bevorzugten Variante schwenkbar ausgebildet. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass bei einer Bewegung der Zwangssteuerung von der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs weg eine Schwenkbewegung des Steuerelements verursacht werden kann, wodurch bei einem bestimmten Schwenkwinkel des Steuerelements eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung durch das Steuerelement auslƶsbar sein kann. Um dies zu ermƶglichen, kann das Steuerelement der Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise sowohl schwenkbar an einem anderen Element der Zwangssteuerung als auch schwenkbar am restlichen Frontautomat gelagert sein. Dazu kƶnnen beispielsweise die beiden Lagerungen sowohl eine Schwenkbewegung als auch eine Translationsbewegung des Steuerelements gegenĆ¼ber dem anderen Element der Zwangssteuerung bzw. dem restlichen Frontautomaten erlauben. Um eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung zu ermƶglichen, kann das Steuerelement zudem beispielsweise derart ausgebildet sein, dass es ab einem bestimmten Winkel in seiner Schwenkbewegung das erste, das zweite oder sowohl das erste als auch das zweite Element derart bewegt oder freigibt, dass ein oder beide Hebel freigegeben werden und somit auseinandergeschwenkt werden kƶnnen. Falls die Zwangssteuerung hingegen nur das Steuerelement, nicht aber die zwei oben erwƤhnten Elemente umfasst, so kann das Steuerelement aber auch derart ausgebildet sein, dass es ab einem bestimmten Winkel in seiner Schwenkbewegung einen oder beide Hebel freigibt, wodurch die beiden Hebel bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung auseinandergeschwenkt werden kƶnnen.If the positive control comprises a control element without the two elements mentioned above, or in addition to the two elements mentioned above, a control element as the third element, this control element is pivotable in a preferred variant. This has the advantage that during a movement of the positive control away from the middle of the positive control path, a pivoting movement of the control can be caused, whereby at a certain pivot angle of the control a lateral safety release can be triggered by the control. To make this possible, the control of the positive control, for example, both pivotally mounted on another element of the positive control and pivotally mounted on the rest of the front automat. For this purpose, for example, the two bearings allow both a pivoting movement and a translational movement of the control relative to the other element of the positive control or the remaining front-end automata. In addition, in order to enable a lateral safety release, the control element can, for example, be designed such that at a certain angle in its pivoting movement it moves or releases the first, the second or both the first and the second element in such a way that one or both levers are released and can thus be moved apart. In contrast, if the positive control comprises only the control element, but not the two above-mentioned elements, the control element can however also be designed such that it releases one or both levers in its pivoting movement at a certain angle, whereby the two levers are activated in the event of a lateral safety release can be swung apart.
Als bevorzugte Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass das Steuerelement nicht schwenkbar ausgebildet ist. In diesem Fall kann das Steuerelement beispielsweise drehbar oder entlang eines linearen Wegs bewegbar ausgebildet sein. In letzterem Fall kann dieser lineare Weg in SkilƤngsrichtung, in Skiquerrichtung, in einem Winkel zu diesen beiden Richtungen, oder aber gekrĆ¼mmt ausgebildet sein.As a preferred variant of this, however, there is also the possibility that the control element is not designed to be pivotable. In this case, the control element may, for example, be designed to be rotatable or movable along a linear path. In the latter case this linear path can be formed in the longitudinal direction of the ski, in the direction of the ski, at an angle to these two directions, or curved.
Alternativ zu diesen Varianten, in welchen die Zwangssteuerung zwei oder mehr Elemente umfasst, besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung nur das Steuerelement oder aber nur ein andersartig ausgebildetes Element umfasst.As an alternative to these variants, in which the positive control comprises two or more elements, there is also the possibility that the positive control comprises only the control element or else only a differently configured element.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung wenigstens drei Elemente, d.h. zusƤtzlich zu den zwei oben erwƤhnten Elementen ein Steuerelement als drittes Element umfasst, sind das erste Element und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung vorzugsweise je durch eine zweite Kulissensteuerung und einen zweiten Kulissenstein am dritten Element der Zwangssteuerung gelagert. Entsprechend kƶnnen das erste und das zweite Element relativ zueinander bewegt werden, indem das dritte Element relativ zum ersten bzw. zweiten Element bewegt wird. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass auf einfache und kostengĆ¼nstige Art und Weise eine BetƤtigung der Zwangssteuerung ermƶglicht wird. Dabei besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen den jeweiligen zweiten Kulissenstein beidseitig umschliessen und fĆ¼hren. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen den jeweiligen zweiten Kulissenstein nicht beidseitig umschliessen und fĆ¼hren, sondern nur einseitig oder nur Ć¼ber einen Bereich beidseitig und ansonsten einseitig fĆ¼hren. Dabei bedeutet einseitig fĆ¼hren, dass beispielsweise der jeweilige zweite Kulissenstein nur auf einer Seite die entsprechende zweite KulissenfĆ¼hrung berĆ¼hrt. Dabei kann es sich bei den zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen beispielsweise um eine FlƤche handeln, auf welcher der jeweilige zweite Kulissenstein abgestĆ¼tzt ist und entlang welcher der jeweilige zweite Kulissenstein bewegbar ist. In diesem Fall kƶnnen die zweiten Kulissensteine beispielsweise mittels eines elastischen Elements gegen die jeweilige zweite KulissenfĆ¼hrung gedrĆ¼ckt werden. Entsprechend wird hier unabhƤngig davon, ob die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen die zweiten Kulissensteine beidseitig oder nur einseitig umschliessen, die Formulierung verwendet, wonach ein zweiter Kulissenstein in der entsprechenden zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrung gefĆ¼hrt ist. UnabhƤngig der konkreten Form und Ausbildung der zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen kƶnnen die zweiten Kulissensteine auf verschiedenste Art und Weise ausgebildet sein. So kƶnnen sie beispielsweise zylinderfƶrmig ausgebildet sein. Sie kƶnnen aber beispielsweise auch zylinderfƶrmig ausgebildet sein und je eine sie umschliessende Rolle aufweisen, durch welche ihre Lagerung in der entsprechenden zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrung verbessert wird. Weiter besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die beiden zweiten Kulissensteine beispielsweise klotzfƶrmig ausgebildet sind. Zudem besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass die beiden zweiten Kulissensteine unterschiedlich geformte Bereiche umfassen. Beispielsweise kƶnnen sie je einen zylinderfƶrmigen Bereich sowie je einen oder mehrere weitere Bereiche aufweisen. Dabei kann beispielsweise je nach Bereich der zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrung der zylinderfƶrmige Bereich oder ein anderer Bereich des jeweiligen zweiten Kulissensteins mit der zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrung zusammenwirken.If the positive control comprises at least three elements, ie in addition to the two elements mentioned above, a control element as a third element, the first element and the second element of the positive control are preferably each supported by a second link control and a second sliding block on the third element of the positive control. Accordingly, the first and second members can be moved relative to each other by moving the third member relative to the first and second members, respectively. This has the advantage that an operation of the positive control is possible in a simple and cost-effective manner. There is the possibility that the second slide guides enclose and guide the respective second sliding block on both sides. But there is also the possibility that the second slide guides do not enclose and guide the respective second sliding block on both sides, but only lead on one side or only on one area on both sides and otherwise on one side. This means unilaterally lead, for example, that the respective second sliding block touches the corresponding second slide guide only on one side. In this case, for example, the second slide guides may be a surface on which the respective second slide block is supported and along which the respective second slide block is movable. In this case, the second sliding blocks can be pressed for example by means of an elastic element against the respective second slotted guide. Accordingly, regardless of whether the second slotted guides surround the second sliding blocks on both sides or only on one side, the formulation is used, according to which a second sliding block is guided in the corresponding second slotted guide. Regardless of the specific shape and design of the second slotted guides, the second sliding blocks can be designed in various ways. For example, they may be cylindrical. But you can also, for example be cylindrical and each have a role enclosing them, by which their storage in the corresponding second link guide is improved. But there is also the possibility that the two second sliding blocks are for example block-shaped. In addition, there is the possibility that the two second sliding blocks comprise differently shaped areas. For example, they can each have a cylindrical area and one or more further areas. In this case, for example, depending on the area of the second slide guide, the cylindrical area or another area of the respective second slide block may interact with the second slide guide.
Als Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass das erste Element der Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise eine Zahnstange umfasst, welche im zweiten Element gefĆ¼hrt ist und dass das dritte Element der Zwangssteuerung ein Ritzel ist, mittels welchem das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung relativ zueinander bewegbar sind. SelbstverstƤndlich sind aber auch andere Varianten mƶglich, bei welchen die Zwangssteuerung wenigstens drei Elemente umfasst.As a variant of this, however, there is also the possibility that the first element of the positive control comprises, for example, a rack which is guided in the second element and in that the third element of the positive control is a pinion, by means of which the first and the second element of the positive control are movable relative to one another are. Of course, other variants are possible in which the positive control comprises at least three elements.
Bei Vorhandensein der zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrung ist das Steuerelement bzw. dritte Element der Zwangssteuerung bevorzugt entlang der SkilƤngsachse bewegbar, wobei bei einer Bewegung des dritten Elements der Zwangssteuerung in eine erste Richtung das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung durch die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen zusammenbewegt werden und bei einer Bewegung des dritten Elements der Zwangssteuerung in eine zweite Richtung das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung durch die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen auseinanderbewegt werden. Dabei kann es sich bei der ersten und der zweiten Richtung in SkilƤngsrichtung gesehen um die VorwƤrts- bzw. RĆ¼ckwƤrtsrichtung oder umgekehrt handeln. Beides hat den Vorteil, dass das dritte Element der Zwangssteuerung fĆ¼r die ĆberfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung und zurĆ¼ck in eine Richtung bewegt wird, welche unabhƤngig von der in Skiquerrichtung orientierten Schwenkbewegung der beiden Hebel oder gegebenenfalls von der mƶglichen Bewegung der Zwangssteuerung in Skiquerrichtung ist. Entsprechend kann durch die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen verhindert werden, dass eine in Skiquerrichtung auf einen oder auf beide Hebel wirkende Kraft eine Ćnderung der Relativpositionen des ersten und des zweiten Elements der Zwangssteuerung bewirken kann. Dadurch wird in der Freigabestellung und in der Festhaltestellung eine einfache und sichere Kontrolle des Abstands zwischen den beiden Halteelementen ermƶglicht.In the presence of the second slotted guide, the control or third element of the positive control is preferably movable along the ski longitudinal axis, wherein upon movement of the third element of the positive control in a first direction, the first and the second element of the positive control are moved together by the second slotted guides and at Movement of the third element of the positive control in a second direction, the first and the second element of the positive control by the second slide guides are moved apart. It can be seen in the first and second direction in the longitudinal direction of the ski in the forward or backward direction or vice versa. Both have the advantage that the third element of the forced control for the transfer of the front vending machine is moved from the release position to the holding position and back in one direction, which is independent of the oriented in Skiquerrichtung pivotal movement of the two levers or possibly of the possible movement of the positive control in Skiquerrichtung is. Accordingly, it can be prevented by the second slide guides, that a force acting on one or both levers in the direction of the ski moves one Change the relative positions of the first and second elements of the positive control can cause. As a result, a simple and reliable control of the distance between the two holding elements is made possible in the release position and in the holding position.
Als Variante dazu kann das Steuerelement bzw. dritte Element der Zwangssteuerung auch nicht entlang der SkilƤngsachse bewegbar, sondern um eine Drehachse drehbar ausgebildet sein. Bei Vorhandensein der zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrung kƶnnen dazu beispielsweise bei einer Drehung des dritten Elements der Zwangssteuerung in eine erste Richtung das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung durch die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen zusammenbewegt werden und bei einer Drehung des dritten Elements der Zwangssteuerung in eine zweite Richtung das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung durch die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen auseinanderbewegt werden. Dazu kƶnnen die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen spiralfƶrmig um die Drehachse im dritten Element der Zwangssteuerung oder aber im ersten bzw. zweiten Element der Zwangssteuerung angeordnet sein.As a variant of this, the control or third element of the positive control can not be moved along the ski longitudinal axis, but can also be designed to be rotatable about a rotation axis. In the presence of the second slotted guide, the first and the second element of the positive control can be moved together by the second slotted guides, for example during a rotation of the third element of the positive control in a first direction and the first and second rotation of the third element of the forced control in a second direction the second element of the positive control are moved apart by the second link guides. For this purpose, the second slide guides can be arranged spirally around the axis of rotation in the third element of the positive control or else in the first or second element of the positive control.
Falls das dritte Element der Zwangssteuerung um die Drehachse drehbar ausgebildet ist, so kann eine Lagerung des ersten und des zweiten Elements am dritten Element auch nicht Ć¼ber die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen ausgebildet sein. Beispielsweise kƶnnen das erste Element und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung auch je durch ein Drehgelenk am dritten Element der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sein, wobei bei einer Drehung des dritten Elements der Zwangssteuerung in eine erste Drehrichtung das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung zusammenbewegt werden und bei einer Bewegung des dritten Elements der Zwangssteuerung in eine zweite Drehrichtung das erste und das zweite Element der Zwangssteuerung auseinanderbewegt werden.If the third element of the positive control is designed to be rotatable about the axis of rotation, then a bearing of the first and the second element on the third element can also not be formed via the second slide guides. For example, the first element and the second element of the positive control can each be mounted by a rotary joint on the third element of the positive control, wherein upon rotation of the third element of the positive control in a first direction of rotation, the first and the second element of the positive control are moved together and at a Movement of the third element of the positive control in a second direction of rotation, the first and the second element of the positive control are moved apart.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist, so umfasst sie vorzugsweise einen Schlitten, welcher entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ausgebildet ist. Dabei besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung zusƤtzlich zum bereits erwƤhnten Steuerelement oder den bereits erwƤhnten zwei Elementen einen solchen Schlitten umfasst. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung einen solchen Schlitten umfasst, welcher gleichzeitig die Funktion des bereits erwƤhnten ersten, zweiten oder dritten Elements bzw. Steuerelements erfĆ¼llt und somit zugleich dem entsprechend ersten, zweiten oder dritten Element bzw. Steuerelement entspricht. Dabei besteht auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass mehr als eines des ersten, zweiten und dritten Elements bzw. Steuerelements als Schlitten ausgebildet ist. Weiter besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung einen solchen Schlitten und keines der oben erwƤhnten Elemente umfasst. Dabei besteht wiederum die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung nur aus einem solchen Schlitten besteht oder aber auch noch weitere Elemente umfasst.If the positive control is movable in the detention position along the positive control travel, it preferably comprises a carriage, which is designed to be movable along the positive control travel. There is the possibility that the positive control in addition to the already mentioned control or the already mentioned two elements comprises such a carriage. But there is also the possibility that the positive control comprises such a carriage, which simultaneously fulfills the function of the already mentioned first, second or third element or control element and thus at the same time corresponds to the corresponding first, second or third element or control element. There is also the possibility that more than one of the first, second and third element or control element is designed as a carriage. Furthermore, there is also the possibility that the positive control comprises such a carriage and none of the above-mentioned elements. In turn, there is the possibility that the positive control consists only of such a slide or even includes other elements.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung einen solchen Schlitten umfasst, so sind die weiteren Elemente der Zwangssteuerung, sofern diese Ć¼berhaupt vorhanden sind, bevorzugt am Schlitten gelagert. Dabei kƶnnen die weiteren Elemente beispielsweise zusammen mit dem Schlitten in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar sein. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass eines oder mehrere der weiteren Elemente sowohl am Schlitten als auch am restlichen Frontautomaten gelagert sind. Falls die Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise ein schwenkbares Element umfasst, so kann dieses schwenkbare Element sowohl am Schlitten als auch am restlichen Frontautomaten gelagert sein und bei einer Bewegung des Schlittens in Skiquerrichtung schwenkbar sein. In diesem Sinne kann beispielsweise wie bereits erwƤhnt das Steuerelement als schwenkbares Element ausgebildet sein und entsprechend sowohl am Schlitten als auch am restlichen Frontautomaten gelagert sein und bei einer Bewegung des Schlittens in Skiquerrichtung schwenkbar sein.If the positive control comprises such a carriage, then the further elements of the positive control, if they are even present, are preferably mounted on the carriage. In this case, the further elements may be movable, for example, together with the carriage in the transverse direction. But there is also the possibility that one or more of the other elements are mounted both on the carriage and the rest of the front vending machine. If the positive control comprises, for example, a pivotable element, then this pivotable element can be mounted both on the carriage and on the remaining front automatic machine and be pivotable in the case of a movement of the carriage in the transverse direction. In this sense, for example, as already mentioned, the control element can be designed as a pivotable element and can be mounted correspondingly both on the carriage and on the rest of the front automatic machine and be pivotable in the case of a movement of the carriage in the transverse direction.
Alternativ dazu besteht auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung keinen solchen Schlitten umfasst.Alternatively, there is also the possibility that the positive control does not include such a carriage.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung einen solchen Schlitten umfasst, so sind vorteilhafterweise die beiden Achsen am Schlitten gelagert. Dabei kƶnnen die Hebel zusƤtzlich an einem weiteren Element der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sein. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die beiden Hebel zusƤtzlich nicht an einem weiteren Element der Zwangssteuerung, sondern sonst am Frontautomaten gelagert sind. Beides hat den Vorteil, dass in der Festhaltestellung die beiden Hebel zusammen mit dem Schlitten bewegt werden kƶnnen.If the positive control comprises such a carriage, so advantageously the two axes are mounted on the carriage. The levers may be additionally mounted on another element of the positive control. But there is also the possibility that the two levers are not additionally stored on another element of the positive control, but otherwise on the front vending machine. Both have the advantage that in the holding position, the two levers can be moved together with the carriage.
Als Alternative dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Achsen nicht am Schlitten, sondern an einem anderen Element der Zwangssteuerung oder des Frontautomaten gelagert sind.Alternatively, however, there is also the possibility that the axles are not mounted on the carriage, but on another element of the positive control or the front automatic.
Vorteilhafterweise weist der Frontautomat in eine Blockierstellung auf, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem dritten Abstand zueinander befinden, welcher gleich gross oder kleiner als der zweite Abstand ist und in welcher die beiden Hebel in ihrer Bewegung blockiert sind. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass der Frontautomat blockierbar ist, wenn ein Skischuh im Frontautomaten festgehalten ist, wodurch verhindert werden kann, dass sich der Skischuh unbeabsichtigt aus dem Frontautomaten befreien kann. Falls sich ein Tourenskibindungssystem mit dem Frontautomaten in der Aufstiegsstellung befindet, kann somit durch die Blockierstellung ein unbeabsichtigter Verlust des Skis verhindert werden. Dies kƶnnte ansonsten beispielsweise beim Absetzen des Skis bei der DurchfĆ¼hrung einer Spitzkehre in einem Steilhang aufgrund eines seitlichen Schlags auf den Ski vorkommen.Advantageously, the front automatic machine in a blocking position, in which the two holding means are at a third distance from each other, which is equal to or smaller than the second distance and in which the two levers are blocked in their movement. This has the advantage that the front automat can be blocked if a ski boot is held in the front automat, whereby it can be prevented that the ski boot can inadvertently free itself from the front automat. If a touring ski binding system with the front automatic machine is in the ascent position, the blocking position can thus prevent an unintentional loss of the ski. This could otherwise occur, for example, when the skis are lowered when making a sharp bend in a steep slope due to a lateral impact on the ski.
Als bevorzugte Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass der Frontautomat anstelle einer Blockierstellung eine DƤmpferstellung aufweist, in welcher sich die beiden Haltemittel in einem dritten Abstand zueinander befinden, welcher gleich gross oder kleiner als der zweite Abstand ist und in welcher die beiden Hebel mit hƶherem Widerstand als in der Festhaltestellung innerhalb des dynamischen Bereichs bewegbar sind. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass der Frontautomat zwar eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung ermƶglichen kann, wenn ein Skischuh im Frontautomaten festgehalten ist, gleichzeitig aber eine Bewegung der Haltemittel zusammen mit dem im Frontautomaten gehaltenen Skischuh entlang des dynamischen Wegs gedƤmpft und entsprechend reduziert werden kann. Falls sich daher ein Tourenskibindungssystem mit dem Frontautomaten in der Aufstiegsstellung befindet, kann durch die DƤmpferstellung eine Bewegung eines im Frontautomaten gehaltenen Skischuhs in Skiquerrichtung relativ zum Ski gedƤmpft und entsprechend reduziert werden. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass fĆ¼r einen SkilƤufer beim Aufstieg die Trittsicherheit erhƶht wird, wƤhrend gleichzeitig die Sicherheit fĆ¼r den SkilƤufer erhalten bleibt, indem die Mƶglichkeit einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung gewƤhrleistet ist.As a preferred variant of this, however, there is also the possibility that the front automatic machine, instead of a blocking position, has a damper position in which the two holding means are at a third distance from each other, which is equal to or smaller than the second distance and in which the two levers higher resistance than in the holding position within the dynamic range are movable. This has the advantage that the front automat can indeed enable a lateral safety release when a ski boot is held in the front vending machine, but at the same time a movement of the holding means can be damped along with the ski boot held in the front vending machine along the dynamic path and reduced accordingly. If, therefore, a touring ski binding system with the front automatic machine is in the ascent position, a movement of a ski boot held in the front automatic machine can be damped in the ski direction relative to the ski by the damper position and reduced accordingly. This has the advantage that for a skier when climbing the slip resistance is increased, while maintaining the safety of the skier by the possibility of a lateral safety release is guaranteed.
Alternativ dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass sowohl auf die Blockierstellung als auch auf die DƤmpferstellung verzichtet wird. Dies kann vorteilhaft sein, falls beispielsweise der Frontautomat von einem geĆ¼bten Skifahrer verwendet wird, welcher nur bei grossen seitlichen KrƤfteeinwirkungen eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung wĆ¼nscht und/oder benƶtigt. In diesem Fall kann der Skischuh auch in der Festhaltestellung durch den Frontautomaten genĆ¼gend festgehalten werden, wodurch keine Blockierung oder DƤmpferstellung benƶtigt wird. Entsprechend kann in diesem Fall durch Verzicht auf die Blockierstellung und die DƤmpferstellung der Frontautomat konstruktiv einfacher und entsprechend leichter ausgebildet werden.Alternatively, however, there is also the possibility that is dispensed with both the blocking position and the damper position. This can be advantageous if For example, the front-end machine is used by a skilled skier, who wishes and / or requires a lateral safety release only with large side forces. In this case, the ski boot can be sufficiently retained even in the hold position by the front vending machine, whereby no blocking or damper position is needed. Accordingly, in this case, by dispensing with the blocking position and the damper position of the front automatic constructively simpler and correspondingly lighter.
Falls der Frontautomat eine Blockierstellung aufweist, so ist bevorzugt die Zwangssteuerung in der Blockierstellung blockierbar. Dies bedeutet, dass die Zwangssteuerung in ihrer Bewegung blockierbar ist, falls sie in der Festhaltestellung bewegbar ist. Falls die Zwangssteuerung hingegen in der Festhaltestellung skifest angeordnet ist, so bedeutet dies, dass die Lagerungen der beiden Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung in der Blockierstellung blockierbar sind. Entsprechend hat die Blockierung der Zwangssteuerung den Vorteil, dass durch die Blockierung eines einzigen Elements eine Bewegung der beiden Hebel verhindert werden kann. Entsprechend kann der Frontautomat einfacher konstruiert sein und kostengĆ¼nstiger hergestellt werden.If the front-end automatic machine has a blocking position, preferably the positive control can be blocked in the blocking position. This means that the positive control is blockable in its movement, if it is movable in the holding position. If the positive control, however, is arranged in the holding position skifest, this means that the bearings of the two levers on the positive control in the blocking position can be blocked. Accordingly, the blocking of the positive control has the advantage that by blocking a single element, a movement of the two levers can be prevented. Accordingly, the front-end machine can be constructed more simply and manufactured more cost-effectively.
Zur Blockierung der Zwangssteuerung besteht beispielsweise die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Zwangssteuerung durch ein Blockierelement blockierbar ist. So kƶnnen beispielsweise ein oder mehrere Blockierelemente an der Zwangssteuerung gelagert sein und zur Blockierung in entsprechende Ćffnungen im Frontautomaten schieb- oder schwenkbar sein. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass ein oder mehrere Blockierelemente am Frontautomaten gelagert sind und zur Blockierung der Zwangssteuerung in entsprechende Ćffnungen in der Zwangssteuerung schieb- oder schwenkbar sind.To block the positive control, for example, there is the possibility that the positive control can be blocked by a blocking element. For example, one or more blocking elements can be mounted on the positive control and can be pushed or pivoted for blocking into corresponding openings in the front automatic machine. But there is also the possibility that one or more blocking elements are mounted on the front automata and can be pushed or pivoted to block the positive control in corresponding openings in the positive control.
Als Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass einer oder beide Hebel in der Blockierstellung blockierbar sind. Dabei kann gleichzeitig auch die Zwangssteuerung blockierbar sein.As a variant of this, however, there is also the possibility that one or both levers can be blocked in the blocking position. At the same time, the forced control can be blocked.
Vorteilhafterweise umfasst der Frontautomat einen Steuerhebel, welcher in eine Freigabeposition und in eine Festhalteposition bringbar ist, wobei der Frontautomat durch Positionierung des Steuerhebels in die Freigabeposition in die Freigabestellung und durch Positionierung des Steuerhebels in die Festhalteposition in die Festhaltestellung bringbar ist. Dabei kann es sich beim Steuerhebel sowohl um einen schwenkbaren als auch um einen verschiebbaren Hebel handeln. Beides hat den Vorteil, dass der Frontautomat auf einfache Art und Weise kontrolliert von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung und zurĆ¼ck gebracht werden kann.Advantageously, the front panel comprises a control lever, which can be brought into a release position and in a retaining position, wherein the front automatic by positioning the control lever in the release position in the release position and by Positioning of the control lever in the holding position in the holding position can be brought. The control lever may be both a pivotable lever and a displaceable lever. Both have the advantage that the front panel can be easily controlled from the release position in the holding position and brought back.
Als Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass der Frontautomat zwei Steuerhebel umfasst, wobei der Frontautomat durch einen ersten dieser beiden Steuerhebel von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung bringbar ist und durch einen zweiten dieser beiden Steuerhebel von der Festhaltestellung in die Freigabestellung bringbar ist.As a variant of this, however, there is also the possibility that the front automatic machine comprises two control levers, wherein the front automatic machine can be brought from the release position into the holding position by a first of these two control levers and can be brought from the holding position into the release position by a second of these two control levers.
Als weitere Variante besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass der Frontautomat einen Steuerhebel umfasst, durch welchen er nur von der Festhaltestellung in die Freigabestellung bringbar ist. Dabei kann der Frontautomat beispielsweise einen Trittsporn umfassen, durch welchen er von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung bringbar ist, wobei dieser Trittsporn von einem Skischuh betƤtigbar ist, wenn der Skischuh fĆ¼r einen Einstieg in den Frontautomaten richtig zu den Haltemitteln positioniert ist. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass fĆ¼r den SkilƤufer ein Einstieg in den Frontautomaten vereinfacht ist. Um diesen Vorteil auch bei den beiden oben erwƤhnten beiden Varianten zu haben, kann dieser Trittsporn auch zusƤtzlich zu dem einen oder den beiden Steuerhebel vorgesehen sein, welche die ĆberfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten von der Festhaltestellung in die Freigabestellung und zurĆ¼ck ermƶglichen.As a further variant, there is the possibility that the front panel comprises a control lever, by which it can be brought only from the holding position in the release position. In this case, the front automat can for example comprise a tread spur, by which it can be brought from the release position into the retaining position, said tread spur can be actuated by a ski boot when the ski boot is properly positioned for entry into the front vending machine to the holding means. This has the advantage that for the skier an entry into the front automate is simplified. To have this advantage also in the two above-mentioned two variants, this tread spur can also be provided in addition to the one or the two control lever, which allow the transfer of the front vending machine from the holding position to the release position and back.
Falls der Frontautomat wenigstens einen Steuerhebel umfasst und eine Blockierstellung aufweist, so ist der Steuerhebel vorzugsweise in eine Blockierposition bringbar, wobei der Frontautomat durch Positionierung des Steuerhebels in die Blockierposition in die Blockierstellung bringbar ist. Falls der Frontautomat hingegen wenigstens einen Steuerhebel umfasst und eine DƤmpferstellung aufweist, so ist der Steuerhebel vorzugsweise in eine DƤmpferposition bringbar, wobei der Frontautomat durch Positionierung des Steuerhebels in der DƤmpferposition in die DƤmpferstellung bringbar ist. Beides hat den Vorteil, dass die Bedienung des Frontautomaten einfach ist.If the front automatic comprises at least one control lever and has a blocking position, the control lever is preferably brought into a blocking position, wherein the front automatic can be brought by blocking the control lever in the blocking position in the blocking position. On the other hand, if the front automat comprises at least one control lever and has a damper position, the control lever can preferably be brought into a damper position, whereby the front automat can be brought into the damper position by positioning the control lever in the damper position. Both have the advantage that the operation of the front automate is easy.
Als Variante dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass der Frontautomat beispielsweise einen separaten Steuerhebel umfasst, durch welchen der Frontautomat in die Blockierstellung oder DƤmpferstellung bringbar ist, oder aber dass der Frontautomat keinen Steuerhebel umfasst, durch welchen der Frontautomat in die Blockierstellung oder DƤmpferstellung bringbar ist.As a variant of this, however, there is also the possibility that the front-mounted machine comprises, for example, a separate control lever, by which the front-end machine can be brought into the blocking position or damper position, or else that the front-engine does not comprise any control lever by which the front-end machine can be brought into the blocking position or damper position ,
Falls der Frontautomat wenigstens einen Steuerhebel umfasst und eine Blockierstellung aufweist, umfasst der Steuerhebel vorzugsweise wenigstens ein Blockierelement, durch welches die Zwangssteuerung in der Blockierstellung blockierbar ist, indem der Steuerhebel in der Blockierposition positioniert wird. Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung bewegbar ist, kann dies beispielsweise dadurch erfolgen, dass das oder die Blockierelemente je in eine Ausnehmung in der Zwangssteuerung eingreifen, wenn der Steuerhebel in die Blockierposition gebracht wird. Es besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass der Steuerhebel zwei oder mehr Blockierelemente aufweist, welche einen Bereich der Zwangssteuerung oder die ganze Zwangssteuerung seitlich umgreifen und die Zwangssteuerung dadurch an ihrer Bewegung hindern. Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung jedoch nicht bewegbar ist, so kann der Steuerhebel beispielsweise zwei oder mehr Blockierelemente umfassen, welche, wenn der Steuerhebel in der Blockierposition ist, in die Lagerungen der beiden Hebel an der Zwangssteuerung eingreifen und dadurch die Zwangssteuerung und die Bewegung der Hebel blockieren.If the front automat comprises at least one control lever and has a blocking position, the control lever preferably comprises at least one blocking element, by means of which the positive control in the blocking position can be blocked by positioning the control lever in the blocking position. If the positive control is movable in the holding position, this can be done, for example, by the blocking element or locking elements each engaging in a recess in the positive control when the control lever is brought into the blocking position. But there is also the possibility that the control lever has two or more blocking elements which surround a portion of the positive control or the entire positive control side and thereby prevent the positive control of their movement. However, if the positive control in the detent position is not movable, the control lever may for example comprise two or more blocking elements which, when the control lever is in the blocking position, engage the bearings of the two levers on the positive control and thereby the positive control and movement of the Block the lever.
Falls der Frontautomat hingegen wenigstens einen Steuerhebel umfasst und eine DƤmpferstellung aufweist, so umfasst der Steuerhebel vorzugsweise wenigstens ein DƤmpferelement, durch welches eine Bewegung der beiden Hebel in der DƤmpferstellung mit einem Bewegungswiderstand belegbar ist, indem der Steuerhebel in der DƤmpferposition positioniert wird. Falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung bewegbar ist, kann dies beispielsweise dadurch erfolgen, dass das oder die DƤmpferelemente mit der Zwangssteuerung zusammenwirken und dadurch den Widerstand einer Bewegung der Zwangssteuerung erhƶhen. In einer Variante dazu oder falls die Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung nicht bewegbar ist, kann der Steuerhebel beispielsweise auch ein oder mehrere DƤmpferelemente umfassen, welche mit den Hebeln oder den Achsen zusammenwirken und so den Bewegungswiderstand der beiden Hebel erhƶhen.On the other hand, if the front automatic transmission comprises at least one control lever and has a damper position, the control lever preferably comprises at least one damper element, by which a movement of the two levers in the damper position can be assigned a movement resistance by positioning the control lever in the damper position. If the positive control can be moved in the holding position, this can be done, for example, by virtue of the fact that the one or more damper elements interact with the positive control and thereby increase the resistance of a movement of the positive control. In a variant of this or if the positive control in the holding position is not movable, the control lever may for example also include one or more damper elements, which interact with the levers or the axles to increase the resistance of the two levers.
Falls die Zwangssteuerung entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist und einen Schlitten umfasst, welcher entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist, sowie der Frontautomat wenigstens einen Steuerhebel mit wenigstens einem DƤmpferelement umfasst und eine DƤmpferstellung aufweist, so erfolgt in einer bevorzugten Variante die Belegung einer Bewegung der beiden Hebel mit einem Bewegungswiderstand, indem das DƤmpferelement mit dem Schlitten zusammenwirkt. Falls die Zwangssteuerung aber ein Steuerelement umfasst, so kann als bevorzugte Variante die Belegung einer Bewegung der beiden Hebel auch mit einem Bewegungswiderstand belegt werden, indem das DƤmpferelement mit dem Steuerelement zusammenwirkt. Alternativ zu diesen beiden Varianten kann die Erhƶhung des Widerstands einer Bewegung der beiden Hebel aber auch andersartig erfolgen.If the positive control is movable along the positive control travel and comprises a carriage which is movable along the positive control travel, and the front automatic comprises at least one control lever with at least one damper element and has a damper position, the occupancy of a movement of the two levers takes place in a preferred variant a resistance to movement by the damper element cooperates with the carriage. If the positive control but includes a control, it can be occupied as a preferred variant, the occupancy of a movement of the two levers with a resistance to movement by the damper element cooperates with the control. As an alternative to these two variants, however, the increase in the resistance of a movement of the two levers can also take place in a different manner.
Falls hingegen die Zwangssteuerung entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist und einen Schlitten umfasst, welcher entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegbar ist, sowie der Frontautomat wenigstens einen Steuerhebel mit einem wenigstens einem Blockierelement umfasst und eine Blockierstellung aufweist, so erfolgt in einer bevorzugten Variante die Blockierung der Zwangssteuerung, indem das Blockierelement in eine Ausnehmung im Schlitten eingreift. Alternativ dazu kann die Blockierung der Zwangssteuerung aber auch andersartig erfolgen.If, on the other hand, the positive control can be moved along the positive control travel and comprises a carriage which is movable along the positive control travel and if the front automatic machine comprises at least one control lever with at least one blocking element and has a blocking position, in a preferred variant the positive control is blocked by the blocking element engages in a recess in the carriage. Alternatively, the blocking of the forced control can also be done differently.
Als Variante zur Blockierung mittels wenigstens einem Blockierelement des Steuerhebels kann die Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise auch nicht nur durch wenigstens ein Blockierelement des Steuerhebels, sondern zusƤtzlich auch andersartig blockierbar sein oder aber anstelle durch wenigstens ein Blockierelement des Steuerhebels andersartig blockierbar sein. Falls die Zwangssteuerung ein Steuerelement umfasst, kann sie beispielsweise durch Blockierung des Steuerelements blockierbar sein. Dazu kann das Steuerelement der Zwangssteuerung beispielsweise in SkilƤngsrichtung in eine seitliche FĆ¼hrung bewegbar sein, wobei das Steuerelement aber auch nicht gƤnzlich in die seitliche FĆ¼hrung bewegbar ausgebildet sein kann, um es ausreichend an einer Bewegung in eine andere Richtung als entlang der SkilƤngsrichtung zu hindern und entsprechend zu blockieren. Um die Blockierung aufzuheben, kann das Steuerelement der Zwangssteuerung in SkilƤngsrichtung aus der seitlichen FĆ¼hrung bewegbar ausgebildet sein, wodurch es fĆ¼r eine Bewegung in eine andere Richtung als entlang der SkilƤngsrichtung freigebbar ist. Bei der in diesem Beispiel zur Blockierung verwendeten seitlichen FĆ¼hrung muss es sich nicht um eine FĆ¼hrung handeln, welche das Steuerelement seitlich gƤnzlich umgreift. Es kann sich auch um eine schienenartige FĆ¼hrung handeln, auf welche das Steuerelement geschoben werden kann. Bei der durch die seitliche FĆ¼hrung blockierten Bewegung des Steuerelements sollte es sich um diejenige Bewegung handeln, welche von der Zwangssteuerung in der Festhaltestellung durchgefĆ¼hrt werden kann. Es kann sich somit sowohl um eine lineare Bewegung in Skiquerrichtung als auch um eine Dreh- oder Schwenkbewegung handeln.As a variant of the blocking by means of at least one blocking element of the control lever, the positive control, for example, not only be blocked by at least one blocking element of the control lever, but in addition also differently or else be blockable differently by at least one blocking element of the control lever. If the constraint includes a control, it may be blockable by, for example, blocking the control. For this purpose, the control of the positive control, for example, in the ski longitudinal direction in a lateral guide to be movable, but the control can not be designed to be fully movable in the lateral guide, to prevent it sufficiently to move in a different direction than along the ski longitudinal direction and accordingly to To block. In order to remove the blockage, the control of the positive control in the longitudinal direction of the ski can be designed to be movable out of the lateral guide, whereby it can be released for movement in a direction other than along the longitudinal direction of the ski. The lateral guide used in this example for blocking need not be a guide which completely surrounds the control laterally. It may also be a rail-like guide on which the control can be pushed. The movement of the control element blocked by the lateral guide should be that movement which can be performed by the forced control in the arresting position. It may thus be both a linear movement in the direction of the cross-section and a turning or pivoting movement.
Falls der Frontautomat einen Steuerhebel umfasst, kann in dieser Variante zur BetƤtigung der Blockierung des Steuerelements beispielsweise das Steuerelement durch den Steuerhebel in SkilƤngsrichtung bewegbar sein. Dies kann zum Beispiel erreicht werden, indem der Frontautomat ein FĆ¼hrungselement umfasst, in welchem das Steuerelement der Zwangssteuerung gelagert ist. Dabei kann das Steuerelement zusammen mit dem FĆ¼hrungselement durch einen mit einem elastischen Element vorgespannten Kolben gegen den Steuerhebel gedrĆ¼ckt werden und dadurch entsprechend der Positionierung des Steuerhebels in SkilƤngsrichtung verschiebbar sein. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass beispielsweise zugleich auch die Zwangssteuerung bei einer Abweichung von einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs durch das elastische Element zur Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs drĆ¼ckbar ausgebildet sein kann. Weiter hat dies den Vorteil, dass das FĆ¼hrungselement zwar gegen den Steuerhebel gedrĆ¼ckt wird, aber dem Steuerhebel nicht zwingend folgen muss. Dies hat gegenĆ¼ber einer direkten Lagerung des FĆ¼hrungselements am Steuerhebel den Vorteil, dass beispielsweise der Steuerhebel von der Blockierposition in die Festhalteposition bringbar sein kann, wodurch das FĆ¼hrungselement gegen den vorgespannten Kolben bewegt wird. Wenn aber der Steuerhebel von der Festhalteposition in die Blockierposition gebracht wird, so kann der Steuerhebel auch ohne Bewegung des FĆ¼hrungselements in die Blockierposition gebracht werden. Falls beispielsweise das FĆ¼hrungselement durch ein Hindernis gehindert wird, durch den vorgespannten Kolben verschoben zu werden, kann das FĆ¼hrungselement auch erst dann vom vorgespannten Kolben bewegt werden, wenn das Hindernis entfernt ist. So besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass das Steuerelement der Zwangssteuerung zur Blockierung erst dann in die seitliche FĆ¼hrung geschoben wird, wenn die Zwangssteuerung richtig zur seitlichen FĆ¼hrung positioniert ist. In einer Variante dieses Beispiels kann der Steuerhebel aber auch von der Festhalteposition in die Blockierposition bringbar sein, wodurch das FĆ¼hrungselement gegen den vorgespannten Kolben bewegt wird. Wenn in dieser Variante aber der Steuerhebel von der Blockierposition in die Festhalteposition gebracht wird, so kann der Steuerhebel auch ohne Bewegung des FĆ¼hrungselements in die Festhalteposition gebracht werden. Je nach Konstruktionsweise des Frontautomaten kann dies vorteilhaft sein. Als weitere Variante kann der Steuerhebel auch direkt am FĆ¼hrungselement gelagert sein, oder aber der Frontautomat kann gar kein FĆ¼hrungselement umfassen. In diesem letzten Fall kann beispielsweise die Zwangssteuerung vom vorgespannten Kolben gegen den Steuerhebel gedrĆ¼ckt werden und/oder die Zwangssteuerung kann auch direkt am Steuerhebel gelagert sein.If the front automatic machine comprises a control lever, in this variant for actuating the blocking of the control element, for example, the control element can be moved by the control lever in the longitudinal direction of the ski. This can be achieved, for example, by the front automatic machine comprising a guide element in which the control element of the positive control is mounted. In this case, the control can be pressed together with the guide element by a biased with an elastic element piston against the control lever and thereby be displaced according to the positioning of the control lever in the ski longitudinal direction. This has the advantage that, for example, at the same time the positive control can be designed to be depressible in the event of a deviation from a center of the positive control path through the elastic element to the middle of the positive control path. Furthermore, this has the advantage that the guide element is indeed pressed against the control lever, but does not necessarily have to follow the control lever. This has the advantage over a direct bearing of the guide element on the control lever that, for example, the control lever can be brought from the blocking position into the retaining position, whereby the guide element is moved against the prestressed piston. But if the control lever is brought from the retaining position to the blocking position, the control lever can be brought into the blocking position without movement of the guide member. For example, if the guide member is prevented from being displaced by the biased piston by an obstacle, the guide member may also be only be moved by the preloaded piston when the obstacle is removed. Thus, there is the possibility that the control of the positive control for blocking is pushed into the lateral guide only when the positive control is correctly positioned for lateral guidance. In a variant of this example, however, the control lever can also be brought from the retaining position to the blocking position, whereby the guide element is moved against the prestressed piston. If in this variant, however, the control lever is brought from the blocking position to the holding position, the control lever can be brought into the holding position without movement of the guide member. Depending on the design of the front automaton, this can be advantageous. As a further variant, the control lever can also be mounted directly on the guide element, or else the front automatic machine can not comprise any guide element. In this last case, for example, the positive control of the preloaded piston can be pressed against the control lever and / or the positive control can also be mounted directly on the control lever.
Nebst diesen Varianten besteht auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass nicht nur das Steuerelement der Zwangssteuerung, sondern dass ein anderes Element der Zwangssteuerung oder die ganze Zwangsteuerung wie fĆ¼r das Steuerelement beschrieben in SkilƤngsrichtung in und aus der seitlichen FĆ¼hrung bewegbar ist. Dies ist selbstverstƤndlich eine Variante, welche auch dann mƶglich ist, wenn die Zwangssteuerung mehr oder weniger als drei Elemente umfasst.In addition to these variants, there is also the possibility that not only the control of the positive control, but that another element of the positive control or the entire forced control as described for the control in the longitudinal direction in and out of the lateral guide is movable. This is of course a variant which is possible even if the positive control comprises more or less than three elements.
Vorzugsweise sind die Haltemittel Stifte, welche derart am jeweiligen Hebel angeordnet sind, dass sie ausgehend vom jeweiligen Hebel mit einem freien Ende zur Skimitte zeigen. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass der Skischuh, welcher im Zehenbereich im Frontautomaten gehalten werden kann, auf einfache Art und Weise schwenkbar um eine horizontal in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete Achse schwenkbar im Frontautomaten gelagert werden kann, wenn der Skischuh in seinem Zehenbereich zwei seitliche Ausnehmungen aufweist.Preferably, the holding means are pins which are arranged on the respective lever so that they point starting from the respective lever with a free end to the ski center. This has the advantage that the ski boot, which can be held in the toe area in the automatic vending machine, can be mounted in a pivotable manner in the automatic vending machine in a pivotable manner about a horizontally oriented axis in the case of the ski boot, if the ski boot has two lateral recesses in its toe area.
In einer ersten bevorzugten Variante davon weisen die Stifte spitze freie Enden auf. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass der Skischuh, welcher im Frontautomat gehalten werden sollte, prƤzise um die horizontal in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete Achse schwenkbar im Frontautomaten gelagert werden kann.In a first preferred variant of the pins have pointed free ends. This has the advantage that the ski boot, which should be held in the front automatic, can be mounted precisely pivotable about the horizontally oriented in Skiquerrichtung axis in the front vending machine.
In einer zweiten bevorzugten Variante davon weisen die Stifte abgerundete freie Enden auf. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass sich der Skischuh bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung einfach aus dem Frontautomaten lƶsen kann.In a second preferred variant thereof, the pins have rounded free ends. This has the advantage that the ski boot can easily be detached from the front automat by a side safety release.
In einer dritten bevorzugten Variante weisen die Stifte zu ihren freien Enden hin spitz zulaufende Bereiche auf, wobei die freien Enden der Stifte abgerundet sind. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass durch eine geeignete Wahl der Grƶsse der spitz zulaufenden Bereiche und der Grƶsse der abgerundeten Enden der Stifte eine Optimierung zwischen prƤzis schwenkbarer Lagerung des Skischuhs um die horizontal in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete Achse und guter Lƶsbarkeit des Skischuhs aus dem Frontautomaten bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung erreicht werden kann.In a third preferred variant, the pins have tapering regions towards their free ends, the free ends of the pins being rounded. This has the advantage that by a suitable choice of the size of the tapered areas and the size of the rounded ends of the pins an optimization between precisely pivotable mounting of the ski to the horizontally oriented in the ski direction axis and good solubility of the ski boot from the front vending machine at a side Safety release can be achieved.
Alternativ dazu besteht aber auch die Mƶglichkeit, dass die Haltemittel anders ausgebildet sind.Alternatively, however, there is also the possibility that the holding means are designed differently.
Vorteilhafterweise umfasst der Frontautomat ein an einem Ski befestigbares GehƤuse sowie ein am Ski befestigbares Niederhalteelement. Dabei ist das GehƤuse vorzugsweise in seinem vorderen Bereich auf einem Ski befestigbar, wƤhrend es in seinem hinteren Bereich durch das Niederhalteelement in SkilƤngsrichtung bewegbar gelagert ist, wobei das GehƤuse durch das am Ski befestigte Niederhalteelement in seinem hinteren Bereich auf dem Ski gehalten werden kann. In einer bevorzugten Variante dazu ist das GehƤuse in seinem hinteren Bereich auf einem Ski befestigbar, wƤhrend es in seinem vorderen Bereich durch das Niederhalteelement in SkilƤngsrichtung bewegbar gelagert ist, wobei das GehƤuse durch das am Ski befestigte Niederhalteelement in seinem vorderen Bereich auf dem Ski gehalten werden kann. Beides fĆ¼hrt dazu, dass im montierten Zustand, wenn der Frontautomat auf einem Ski befestigt ist, das GehƤuse in seinem vorderen bzw. hinteren Bereich am Ski befestigt ist, wƤhrend der hintere bzw. vordere Bereich des GehƤuses in der LƤngsfĆ¼hrung des am Ski befestigten Niederhalteelements gehalten ist und sich in SkilƤngsrichtung relativ zum Niederhalteelement bewegen kann. Dadurch wird ermƶglicht, dass sich der Ski beim Skifahren durchbiegen kann, wobei sich der Frontautomat der Biegung des Skis anpasst, indem das GehƤuse gegenĆ¼ber dem Niederhalteelement in SkilƤngsrichtung bewegt wird. Dies hat den Vorteil, dass der Frontautomat zu keiner Versteifung des Skis fĆ¼hrt, wodurch fĆ¼r den Skifahrer der Fahrkomfort optimiert ist. Dabei ist zu bemerken, dass dieser Vorteil auch bei einem beliebigen anderen Frontautomaten oder einem beliebigen Fersenautomaten einer Tourenskibindung des eingangs erwƤhnten zweiten Typs erzielt werden kann, wenn die tragende Struktur wie hier das GehƤuse an einem Ende am Ski befestigt wird, wƤhrend das andere Ende der tragenden Struktur in der LƤngsfĆ¼hrung des am Ski befestigten Niederhalteelements gehalten ist und sich in SkilƤngsrichtung relativ zum Niederhalteelement bewegen kann.Advantageously, the front automatic machine comprises a housing which can be fastened to a ski and a hold-down element which can be fastened to the ski. In this case, the housing is preferably fastened in its front region on a ski, while it is movably mounted in the rear region by the hold-down element in the ski longitudinal direction, wherein the housing can be held by the attached to the ski hold-down element in its rear region on the ski. In a preferred variant of this, the housing can be fastened in its rear region on a ski while it is movably supported in its front region by the hold-down element in the longitudinal direction of the ski, the housing being held on the ski by the hold-down element fastened to the ski in its front region can. Both result in the fact that in the mounted state, when the front automatic is mounted on a ski, the housing is fixed in its front or rear portion of the ski, while the rear or front portion of the housing held in the longitudinal guide of the ski-mounted hold-down element is and can move in the ski longitudinal direction relative to the hold-down element. This makes it possible for the ski to bend during skiing, with the front automatic adjusting the bending of the ski by moving the housing in the ski longitudinal direction with respect to the hold-down element. This has the advantage that the front automatic does not lead to any stiffening of the ski, which is optimized for the skier driving comfort. there It should be noted that this advantage can be achieved in any other frontal or any heel machine of touring ski binding of the aforementioned second type, if the supporting structure as here the housing is attached at one end to the ski, while the other end of the supporting Structure is held in the longitudinal guide of the ski-mounted hold-down element and can move in the ski longitudinal direction relative to the hold-down element.
In einer weiteren bevorzugten Variante dazu kann der Frontautomat aber auch andersartig an einem Ski befestigbar sein. Beispielsweise kann der Frontautomat ein GehƤuse umfassen, welches fest am Ski befestigbar ist, wobei der Frontautomat ein separates Niederhalteelement umfasst. Dies hat beispielsweise den Vorteil, dass der Frontautomat einfacher und daher kostengĆ¼nstiger hergestellt werden kann.In a further preferred variant, however, the front-end machine can also be fastened to a ski in a different manner. For example, the front-mounted machine can comprise a housing which can be fastened firmly to the ski, wherein the front-mounted machine comprises a separate hold-down element. This has the advantage, for example, that the front-end machine can be made simpler and therefore less expensive.
Aus der nachfolgenden Detailbeschreibung und der Gesamtheit der PatentansprĆ¼che ergeben sich weitere vorteilhafte AusfĆ¼hrungsformen und Merkmalskombinationen der Erfindung.From the following detailed description and the totality of the claims, further advantageous embodiments and feature combinations of the invention result.
Die zur ErlƤuterung des AusfĆ¼hrungsbeispiels verwendeten Zeichnungen zeigen:
- Fig. 1a, b, c
- eine SchrƤgansicht eines erfindungsgemƤssen Frontautomaten in der Freigabestellung, in der Festhaltestellung und in der Blockierstellung,
- Fig. 2
- eine schematische SchrƤgansicht des Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung mit einem im Frontautomaten gelagerten Skischuh,
- Fig. 3
- eine Explosionszeichnung des Frontautomaten,
- Fig. 4a, b, c
- drei verschiedene Ansichten des Frontautomaten in der Freigabestellung,
- Fig. 5a, b, c
- drei verschiedene Ansichten des Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung,
- Fig. 6a, b, c, d
- drei verschiedene Ansichten des Frontautomaten in der Blockierstellung,
- Fig. 7a, b, c
- durch eine Zwangssteuerung verlaufende Querschnitte durch den Frontautomaten jeweils zusammen mit einem schematisch dargestellten Schnitt durch einen unteren Bereich eines Skischuhs zur Illustration einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung des Frontautomaten,
- Fig. 8a, b, c
- Ansichten des Frontautomaten von unten zur Illustration einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung des Frontautomaten, wobei eine Bodenplatte und ein FĆ¼hrungselement jeweils ausgeblendet sind,
- Fig. 9
- einen vertikalen LƤngsschnitt durch den Frontautomaten in der Blockierstellung, wobei ein Skischuh im Frontautomaten gelagert ist,
- Fig. 10
- eine Aufsicht auf den Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung mit einem darin gehaltenen Skisschuh,
- Fig 11a, b, c
- Ansichten des Frontautomaten von unten zur Illustration einer AusfĆ¼hrungsmƶglichkeit des Zusammenspiels eines Kolbens mit der Zwangssteuerung,
- Fig. 12a, b, c
- Ansichten des Frontautomaten von unten zur Illustration einer weiteren AusfĆ¼hrungsmƶglichkeit des Zusammenspiels des Kolbens mit der Zwangssteuerung,
- Fig 13a, b
- durch die Zwangssteuerung verlaufende Querschnitte durch den Frontautomaten zur Illustration von AusfĆ¼hrungsmƶglichkeiten, welche eine seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung des Frontautomaten erleichtern kƶnnen,
- Fig. 14a, b, c, d
- eine SchrƤgansicht eines weiteren erfindungsgemƤssen Frontautomaten in der Freigabestellung, in der Festhaltestellung und in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung,
- Fig. 15
- eine Explosionszeichnung des weiteren Frontautomaten,
- Fig. 16a, b
- zwei vergrƶsserte Ausschnitte aus der in
Figur 15 gezeigten Explosionszeichnung, - Fig. 17a, b
- zwei verschiedene Schnittansichten des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Freigabestellung,
- Fig. 18a, b
- zwei verschiedene Schnittansichten des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung, wobei sich die Zwangssteuerung in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs befindet,
- Fig. 19a, b
- zwei verschiedene Schnittansichten des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung, wobei sich die Zwangssteuerung beinahe an einem Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs befindet,
- Fig. 20a, b
- zwei verschiedene Schnittansichten des Frontautomaten in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung,
- Fig. 21a, b
- zwei weitere Schnittansichten des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Freigabestellung,
- Fig. 22
- eine weitere Schnittansicht des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung,
- Fig. 23a, b
- zwei Schnittansichten des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Blockierstellung,
- Fig. 24a, b, c
- drei Schnittansichten einer Querschnittsdarstellung des weiteren Frontautomaten in der Freigabestellung, der Festhaltestellung und in der Blockierstellung,
- Fig. 25
- eine Explosionszeichnung eines weiteren erfindungsgemƤssen Frontautomaten,
- Fig. 26
- ein vergrƶsserter Ausschnitt aus der in
gezeigten Explosionszeichnung,Figur 25 - Fig. 27a, b, c
- drei Unteransichten des in den
Figuren 25 - 26 gezeigten weiteren Frontautomaten in der Festhaltestellung und in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung, - Fig. 28
- eine Explosionszeichnung eines weiteren erfindungsgemƤssen Frontautomaten,
- Fig. 29a, b, c
- je eine Unteransicht eines horizontal ausgerichteten Querschnitts durch den in
Figur 28 gezeigten, weiteren Frontautomaten, wobei die Querschnitte jeweils durch ein Schwenkelement des Frontautomaten verlaufen, - Fig. 30a, b, c
- je einen vertikal ausgerichteten, entlang der Skimitte in SkilƤngsrichtung verlaufenden Querschnitt durch den in den
Figuren 28 - 29c gezeigten, weiteren Frontautomaten und - Fig. 31
- eine Explosionszeichnung eines weiteren erfindungsgemƤssen Frontautomaten,.
- Fig. 1a, b, c
- an oblique view of an inventive front automatic in the release position, in the holding position and in the blocking position,
- Fig. 2
- a schematic oblique view of the front vending machine in the holding position with a stored in the vending machine ski boot,
- Fig. 3
- an exploded view of the front automat,
- Fig. 4a, b, c
- three different views of the front automat in the release position,
- Fig. 5a, b, c
- three different views of the front automat in the arrest position,
- Fig. 6a, b, c, d
- three different views of the front automat in the blocking position,
- Fig. 7a, b, c
- by a positive control extending cross-sections through the front vending machine in each case together with a schematically illustrated section through a lower portion of a ski boot to illustrate a lateral safety release of the front vending machine,
- Fig. 8a, b, c
- Views of the front vending machine from below for illustrating a lateral safety release of the front vending machine, wherein a bottom plate and a guide element are each hidden,
- Fig. 9
- a vertical longitudinal section through the front vending machine in the blocking position, wherein a ski boot is stored in the front vending machine,
- Fig. 10
- a view of the front vending machine in the holding position with a ski boot held therein,
- 11a, b, c
- Views of the front automatic from below to illustrate an embodiment of the interaction of a piston with the positive control,
- Fig. 12a, b, c
- Views of the front automatic from below to illustrate another possible embodiment of the interaction of the piston with the positive control,
- Fig. 13a, b
- through the positive control running cross sections through the front vending machine to illustrate execution options that can facilitate lateral safety release of the front vending machine,
- Fig. 14a, b, c, d
- an oblique view of another inventive front automatic in the release position, in the holding position and in the safety release position,
- Fig. 15
- an exploded view of the other front-end vending machine,
- Fig. 16a, b
- two enlarged details from the in
FIG. 15 shown exploded view, - Fig. 17a, b
- two different sectional views of the other front automatic in the release position,
- Fig. 18a, b
- two different sectional views of the other front automatic in the holding position, wherein the positive control is located in the middle of the positive control path,
- Fig. 19a, b
- two different sectional views of the other front automatic in the detention position, wherein the positive control is almost at one end of the positive control path,
- Fig. 20a, b
- two different sectional views of the front automat in the safety release position,
- Fig. 21a, b
- two further sectional views of the other front automatic in the release position,
- Fig. 22
- a further sectional view of the other front automatic in the holding position,
- Fig. 23a, b
- two sectional views of the other front automatic in the blocking position,
- Fig. 24a, b, c
- three sectional views of a cross-sectional view of the other front automatic in the release position, the holding position and in the blocking position,
- Fig. 25
- an exploded view of another inventive front-end automata,
- Fig. 26
- an enlarged section of the in
FIG. 25 shown exploded view, - Fig. 27a, b, c
- three sub-views of the in the
FIGS. 25-26 shown further front automatic in the holding position and in the safety release position, - Fig. 28
- an exploded view of another inventive front-end automata,
- Fig. 29a, b, c
- depending on a bottom view of a horizontally oriented cross-section through the in
FIG. 28 shown, further front automatic machines, wherein the cross sections in each case run through a pivoting element of the front automatic, - Fig. 30a, b, c
- depending on a vertically oriented, along the ski center in the longitudinal direction extending cross-section through the in the
Figures 28-29c shown, another front-end and - Fig. 31
- an exploded view of another inventive front automatic,.
GrundsƤtzlich sind in den Figuren gleiche Teile mit gleichen Bezugszeichen versehen.Basically, the same parts are provided with the same reference numerals in the figures.
Die
Der Frontautomat 1 umfasst ein GehƤuse 2, einen Steuerhebel 3 sowie einen Trittsporn 4 aus Kunststoff. Weiter umfasst der Frontautomat 1 zwei Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 aus Aluminium mit je einem Haltesporn 6.1, 6.2 aus Stahl. Die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 sind seitlich, sich in Skiquerrichtung gegenĆ¼berliegend, angeordnet. Sie sind je um eine Achse 9.1, 9.2 schwenkbar gelagert (siehe
Vor den beiden Schwenkhebeln 5.1, 5.2 ist in einer Skimitte der Trittsporn 4 um eine horizontal in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete Querachse 7 schwenkbar gelagert. Ein freies Ende des Trittsporns 4 reicht oberhalb der Zwangssteuerung 20 nach hinten zwischen die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2. In der Freigabestellung (
Nebst dem Trittsporn 4 ist auch der Steuerhebel 3 um die Querachse 7 schwenkbar gelagert. Ein freies Ende des Steuerhebels 3, welches zu dessen BetƤtigung dient, weist nach vorne. In der Freigabestellung (
In der Freigabestellung sind die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 etwas auseinandergeschwenkt und die beiden Haltesporne 6.1, 6.2 befinden sich in einem ersten Abstand zueinander (
Um eine ĆberfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten 1 von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung zu erreichen, bei welcher ein Skischuh im Frontautomaten 1 gelagert wird, kann der Skischuh in aufrechter, skiparalleler Ausrichtung mit seinem Zehenbereich zwischen den beiden Schwenkhebeln 5.1, 5.2 positioniert und sachte nach unten bewegt werden. Dabei wird der Trittsporn 4 von einer Sohle des Skischuhs nach unten gedrĆ¼ckt, wodurch der Frontautomat 1 in die Festhaltestellung Ć¼berfĆ¼hrt wird. Wenn der Skischuh richtig positioniert ist, greifen dabei die beiden Haltesporne 6.1, 6.2 in seitliche Lagerbuchsen des Skischuhs ein, indem die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 zusammenbewegt werden. Gleichzeitig wird durch das HinunterdrĆ¼cken des Trittsporns 4 auch der Steuerhebel 3 in die Festhalteposition hochgeschwenkt. Bei dieser ĆberfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten 1 von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung kann der Steuerhebel 3 auch gleichzeitig manuell von der Freigabeposition in die Festhalteposition hochgehoben werden.In order to achieve a transfer of the
Hinter den beiden Schwenkhebeln 5.1, 5.2 weist das GehƤuse 2 einen FĆ¼hrungsbalken 14 auf, welcher in Skiquerrichtung von einer ersten Seite zu einer zweiten Seite des GehƤuses 2 verlƤuft. Dieser FĆ¼hrungsbalken 14 ist gegenĆ¼ber dem restlichen GehƤuse 2 etwas erhƶht und dient dazu, einen Skischuh daran zu hindern, ganz auf dem GehƤuse 2 abgestellt zu werden. Im Falle einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung dient er zudem dazu, eine Bewegung des Skischuhs in seitlicher Richtung zu unterstĆ¼tzen und zu verhindern, dass sich eine Sohle des Skischuhs mit dem restlichen GehƤuse 2 verfangen kann. Um diese Funktion zu optimieren, kann der FĆ¼hrungsbalken 14 in seinem oberen Bereich ein Gleitelement aufweisen, auf welchem die Sohle des Skischuhs gleiten kann. Ein solches Gleitelement kann beispielsweise aus Teflon gefertigt sein.Behind the two pivoting levers 5.1, 5.2, the
In einem vom GehƤuse 2 und der Bodenplatte 30 umschlossenen Innenraum des Frontautomaten 1 sind mehrere Elemente angeordnet. So ist in einem hinteren Bereich des GehƤuses 2 in der Skimitte ein aus Kunststoff gefertigter Kolben 35 angeordnet. Dieser Kolben 35 ist in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtet. In einem oberen Bereich weist er eine in seiner LƤngsrichtung ausgerichtete FĆ¼hrung auf, die in ein entsprechendes GegenstĆ¼ck im GehƤuse 2 eingreifen kann. Dadurch ist der Kolben 35 in SkilƤngsrichtung gefĆ¼hrt. In seinem hinteren Bereich weist der Kolben 35 eine Ćffnung auf, in welche eine in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtete Spiralfeder 36 eingefĆ¼hrt ist. Diese Spiralfeder 36 stƶsst mit ihrem hinteren Ende gegen eine Sperrmutter 37, welche mit einem Gewinde auf eine in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtete Stellschraube 38 geschraubt ist. Im montierten Zustand des Frontautomaten 1 ist ein Kopf der Stellschraube 38 in einer Ćffnung 39 in einer nach hinten ausgerichteten Seitenwand des GehƤuses 2 gelagert. Dabei ist die Stellschraube 38 von aussen durch die Ćffnung 39 drehbar.In a space enclosed by the
Vor dem Kolben 35 ist im GehƤuse 2 ein aus Kunststoff gefertigtes FĆ¼hrungselement 50 gelagert. Dieses FĆ¼hrungselement 50 weist in einem hinteren Bereich beidseitig je einen nach hinten weisenden Arm auf. Im montierten Zustand des Frontautomaten 1 ist der Kolben 35 von vorne her beidseitig von diesen Armen umgriffen. Weiter weist das FĆ¼hrungselement 50 in einem vorderen Bereich beidseitig je einen nach vorne zeigenden, kurzen Arm auf. Diese beiden Arme umfassen in einem vorderen Bereich je einen nach oben zeigenden Noppen 51.1, 51.2. Nach hinten werden diese beiden Arme durch eine vertikal und in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete, einen vorderen Anschlag 52 bildende Platte von einem Mittelbereich 53 des FĆ¼hrungselements 50 abgegrenzt. Dieser Mittelbereich 53 ist plattenfƶrmig und horizontal ausgerichtet. Nach hinten wird er von den beiden nach hinten weisenden Armen abgegrenzt, welche nach oben bis oberhalb einer Ebene des Mittelbereichs 53 reichen und dadurch einen hinteren Anschlag bilden. Auf dem Mittelbereich 53 ist die Zwangssteuerung 20 in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar gelagert. Dabei ist sie zwischen dem vorderen Anschlag 52 und dem hinteren Anschlag gefĆ¼hrt und entsprechend an einer Bewegung in SkilƤngsrichtung relativ zum FĆ¼hrungselement 50 gehindert.In front of the
Wie hier in der Explosionszeichnung ersichtlich, umfasst die Zwangssteuerung 20 zwei Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 und eine Steuerplatte 20.3. Letztere ist wie oben beschrieben im FĆ¼hrungselement 50 in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar gelagert. Auf beiden Seiten der Steuerplatte 20.3 ist je einer der beiden Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtet angeordnet. Die Lagerung der beiden Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 an der Steuerplatte 20.3 besteht je aus einer zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrung 21.1, 21.2 in der Steuerplatte 20.3 mit einem darin gelagerten zweiten Kulissenstein 22.1, 22.2, welcher am entsprechenden Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 angebracht ist. Dabei sind die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 21.1, 21.2 derart ausgerichtet, dass sie in SkilƤngsrichtung eine Relativbewegung der Steuerplatte 20.3 zu den Seitenhebeln 20.1, 20.2 erlauben, wodurch die beiden Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 zusammengezogen bzw. auseinandergestossen werden. An Ƥusseren Enden der Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 sind die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 gelagert. Dazu umfassen die Seitenhebel 20.1, 20.2 je eine erste KulissenfĆ¼hrung 23.1, 23.2, in welcher je ein am entsprechenden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 angeordneter erster Kulissenstein 24.1, 24.2 gelagert ist. Dabei sind die ersten Kulissensteine 24.1, 24.2 am jeweiligen Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 oberhalb der Achsen 9.1, 9.2 angeordnet, um welche die Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 schwenkbar am GehƤuse 2 gelagert sind.As can be seen here in the exploded view, the
Nebst den zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 21.1, 21.2 weist die Steuerplatte 20.3 zwei Einschnitte 27.1, 27.2 auf, welche auf einer nach vorne ausgerichteten Seite der Steuerplatte 20.3 nebeneinander angeordnet sind. In diese beiden Einschnitte 27.1, 27.2 kƶnnen zwei am Steuerhebel 3 angebrachte Riegel 28.1, 28.2 eingreifen. Dadurch kann die Steuerplatte 20.3 in der Blockierstellung an einer Bewegung in Skiquerrichtung gehindert werden.In addition to the second slotted guides 21.1, 21.2, the control plate 20.3 two incisions 27.1, 27.2, which are arranged side by side on a forward-facing side of the control plate 20.3. In this two incisions 27.1, 27.2 can be attached to the
Im montierten Zustand des Frontautomaten 1 ist die Spiralfeder 36 zwischen dem Kolben 35 und der Sperrmutter 37 vorgespannt. Nach hinten ist sie Ć¼ber die Sperrmutter 37 und die Stellschraube 38 auf einer Innenseite des GehƤuses 2 abgestĆ¼tzt. Durch drehen der Stellschraube 38, wodurch die Sperrmutter 37 nach vorne oder hinten bewegt wird, kann dabei die Vorspannung der Spiralfeder 36 eingestellt werden. Entsprechend drĆ¼ckt die Spiralfeder 36 den Kolben 35 mit einer einstellbaren Kraft nach vorne, wo der Kolben 35 gegen die Steuerplatte 20.3 abgestĆ¼tzt ist. Dazu weist der Kolben 35 ein seitlich abgerundetes, vorderes Ende mit einem horizontalen Schlitz auf. In diesem Schlitz ist eine runde Stahlscheibe 40 horizontal ausgerichtet und um eine vertikale Achse 41 drehbar gelagert. Mit dieser Stahlscheibe 40 stƶsst der Kolben 35 in einer seitlich abgeflachten Einbuchtung 25 in der Steuerplatte 20.3 an. Wenn die Steuerplatte 20.3 im FĆ¼hrungselement 50 seitlich bewegt wird, rollt die Stahlscheibe 40 entlang der entsprechenden Flanke der seitlich abgeflachten Einbuchtung 25 in der Steuerplatte 20.3 aus der Einbuchtung 25 heraus (siehe
Die
Wie in
Weiter ist in der
Im Querschnitt, welcher in
Die
In
Im Querschnitt (
Die
In den
Dieses Zusammenziehen der beiden Haltesporne 6.1, 6.2 in der Blockierstellung kann auch durch einen etwas modifizierten Mechanismus erfolgen. Beispielsweise kƶnnen die nach vorne verlaufenden Arme des FĆ¼hrungselements 50 eine Rasterung aufweisen, welche im Wesentlichen halbkreisfƶrmig nach vorne oben verlƤuft, wobei der Kurvenradius nach oben hin abnimmt. In dieser Modifikation kann am Steuerhebel 3 pro Seite im Bereich unterhalb der Querachse 7 je ein Noppen angeordnet sein. Mit diesen Noppen kann der Steuerhebel 3 auf die beiden Rasterungen der nach vorne zeigenden Arme des FĆ¼hrungselements 50 drĆ¼cken. Je weiter der Steuerhebel 3 in der Blockierstellung nach oben gezogen wird, desto weiter werden die Noppen Ć¼ber die Rasterungen des FĆ¼hrungselements 50 gezogen. Durch den nach oben verjĆ¼ngten Kurvenradius der Rasterungen werden dabei das FĆ¼hrungselement 50 und die darin gelagerte Steuerplatte 20.3 in SkilƤngsrichtung nach vorne gezogen. Ćber die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 21.1, 21.2 und die zweiten Kulissensteine 22.1, 22.2 kƶnnen dadurch die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 mit den Haltespornen 6.1, 6.2 zusammengezogen werden.This contraction of the two holding spurs 6.1, 6.2 in the blocking position can also be done by a somewhat modified mechanism. For example, the forwardly extending arms of the
Nebst dem Zusammenziehen der beiden Haltesporne 6.1, 6.2 in der Blockierstellung werden durch das Hochziehen des Steuerhebels 3 die beiden Riegel 28.2 in die entsprechenden Einschnitte 27.2 in der Steuerplatte 20.3 eingefĆ¼hrt (siehe
Wenn der Steuerhebel 3 von der Blockierposition nach unten in die Festhalteposition geschwenkt wird, so wird die Rasterung 12 von den Noppen 51.2 des FĆ¼hrungselements 50 nach hinten wegbewegt. Dabei stƶsst die Rasterung 12 am ersten Anschlag 52 des FĆ¼hrungselements 50 an. Wenn nun der Steuerhebel 3 weiter nach unten bis in die Freigabeposition geschwenkt wird, drĆ¼ckt die Rasterung 12 den ersten Anschlag 52 nach hinten. Dadurch wird das FĆ¼hrungselement 50 mit der darin gelagerten Steuerplatte 20.3 gegen den Kolben 35 und gegen die Vorspannung der Spiralfeder 36 nach hinten bewegt (siehe
Die
In der
Im Zustand, in welchem die Zwangssteuerung 20 skimittig zentriert ist, befinden sich die beiden ersten Kulissensteine 24.1, 24.2 im Wesentlichen oberhalb der Achsen 9.1, 9.2, um welche die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 schwenkbar sind (
Wenn die Zwangssteuerung 20 nach rechts bis an das Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt ist und die beiden Schwenkhebel 5.1, 5.2 nach rechts bis an ein Ende des dynamischen Bereichs geschwenkt sind, so befinden sich die beiden ersten Kulissensteine 24.1, 24.2 im Knick der ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 23.1, 23.2. In diesem Fall stƶsst aufgrund der Geometrie der ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 23.1, 23.2 der erste Kulissenstein 24.2 des linken Schwenkhebels 5.2 gegen die erste KulissenfĆ¼hrung 23.2 des entsprechenden Seitenhebels 20.2 an und hindert damit die Zwangssteuerung 20 an einer Weiterbewegung nach rechts. Gleichzeitig ist die Zwangssteuerung 20 so weit nach rechts bewegt, dass der erste Kulissenstein 24.1 des rechten Schwenkhebels 5.1 vom Knick in der ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung 23.1 freigegeben ist und sich frei im bogenfƶrmigen Abschnitt der ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung 23.1 des entsprechenden Seitenhebels 20.1 bewegen kann. Dadurch kann der rechte Schwenkhebel 5.1 frei nach unten kippen, wodurch sich der Frontautomat 1 in einer Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung befindet (
Die
Die
Wie bereits im Zusammenhang mit der
Die seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung, die in den
Der Frontautomat 1 ermƶglicht nicht nur eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung, sondern auch eine Auslƶsung in VorwƤrtsrichtung. Diese Frontalauslƶsung kann erfolgen, wenn sich der Frontautomat 1 in der Festhaltestellung oder in der Blockierstellung befindet. Um dies zu illustrieren, zeigt die
Der Frontautomat 1 kann in einem Tourenskibindungssystem zusammen mit einem Fersenautomaten (nicht gezeigt) verwendet werden. In einem solchen System sollte der Fersenautomat eine Lagerung des Skischuhs 100 in einem Fersenbereich ermƶglichen. Entsprechend ermƶglicht ein solches System eine Abfahrtsstellung, in welcher sich der Frontautomat 1 in der Festhaltestellung befindet und in welcher der Skischuh 100 in seinem Zehenbereich im Frontautomat 1 und in seinem Fersenbereich am Fersenautomat gelagert ist. Weiter ermƶglicht ein solches Tourenskibindungssystem eine Aufstiegsstellung, in welcher der Skischuh 100 im Frontautomat 1 gelagert ist und vom Fersenautomat freigegeben ist. In dieser Aufstiegsstellung kann sich der Frontautomat 1 in der Festhaltestellung oder in der Blockierstellung befinden. Er ermƶglicht in beiden Stellungen eine Schwenkbewegung des Skischuhs 100 um eine Skiquerachse und ermƶglicht entsprechend eine Gehbewegung eines SkilƤufers.The front automatic 1 can be used in a touring ski binding system together with an automatic heel unit (not shown). In such a system, the automatic heel unit should allow storage of the
Wie oben beschrieben, ermƶglicht der Frontautomat 1 in der Festhaltestellung eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung. Wenn ein Skischuh 100 in einem Tourenskibindungssystem mit dem Frontautomaten 1 gelagert ist und sich das Tourenskibindungssystem in der Abfahrtsstellung befindet, so ermƶglicht das Tourenskibindungssystem dadurch eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung. Wenn beispielsweise der Skischuh 100 durch von hinten nach vorne zeigende Haltesporne am Fersenautomaten gelagert ist, kann der Skischuh 100 bei einer solchen seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung eine Drehbewegung durchfĆ¼hren. Dabei wird er erst seitlich vom Frontautomaten 1 gelƶst, wƤhrend er noch von den Haltespornen des Fersenautomaten gehalten wird. Sobald der Skischuh 100 vom Frontautomat 1 gelƶst ist, kann er auch vom Fersenautomaten gelƶst werden, indem er von den Haltespornen des Fersenautomaten wegbewegt bzw. weggedreht wird. Entsprechend erĆ¼brigt sich eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsemƶglichkeit durch den Fersenautomat. Es genĆ¼gt, wenn der Fersenautomat eine Sicherheitsauslƶsung in VorwƤrtsrichtung ermƶglicht.As described above, the
Der Frontautomat 1 ist optimiert fĆ¼r eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung bei einem Tourenskibindungssystem, bei welchem der Fersenautomat keine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung ermƶglicht. Diese Optimierung ist in der
Wie aus den
Ćhnlich wie die
Der Frontautomat 1, welcher in den
Die
Wenn die Zwangssteuerung 20 bis an ein Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt wird, so rastet der den Kolben 25 berĆ¼hrende zweite bzw. dritte Fuss 45.2, 45.3 des Schwenkelements 43 in einer entsprechenden Mulde 46.1, 46.2 in der Vorderseite des Kolbens 35 ein (
In der
Die
UnabhƤngig von den in den
Im Vergleich zu den in den vorhergehenden Figuren gezeigten AusfĆ¼hrungsmƶglichkeiten weisen die Haltesporne 6.1, 6.2, welche in den
Die
Der hier gezeigte, erfindungsgemƤsse Frontautomat 201 unterscheidet sich unter anderem dadurch vom vorhergehend beschriebenen, erfindungsgemƤssen Frontautomaten 1, dass die Achsen (siehe
In der
In einem vom GehƤuse 202 und der Bodenplatte 230 umschlossenen Innenraum des Frontautomaten 201 sind mehrere Elemente angeordnet. So ist in einem hinteren Bereich des GehƤuses 202 in der Skimitte ein aus Kunststoff gefertigter Kolben 235 angeordnet. Dieser Kolben 235 ist in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtet und in SkilƤngsrichtung gefĆ¼hrt. In seinem hinteren Bereich weist der Kolben 235 eine Ćffnung auf, in welche eine in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtete Spiralfeder 236 eingefĆ¼hrt ist. Diese Spiralfeder 236 stƶsst mit ihrem hinteren Ende gegen eine Sperrmutter 237, welche mit einem Gewinde auf eine in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtete Stellschraube 238 geschraubt ist. Im montierten Zustand des Frontautomaten 201 ist ein Kopf der Stellschraube 238 in einer Ćffnung 239 in einer nach hinten ausgerichteten Seitenwand des GehƤuses 202 gelagert. Dabei ist die Stellschraube 238 von aussen durch die Ćffnung 239 drehbar.In an enclosed by the
Vor dem Kolben 235 ist im GehƤuse 202 auf der Bodenplatte 230 das aus Stahl, Aluminium oder Kunststoff gefertigte FĆ¼hrungselement 250 gelagert. Dieses FĆ¼hrungselement 250 weist in einem hinteren Bereich eine Lagerbuchse zur Lagerung einer zweiten vertikalen Achse 249 sowie in einem vorderen Bereich beidseitig je einen nach oben zeigenden Noppen 251.1, 251.2 auf. Weiter weist das FĆ¼hrungselement 250 in SkilƤngsrichtung gesehen in einem mittleren Bereich eine vertikal und in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete, einen vorderen Anschlag 252 bildende Platte auf, welche einen Mittelbereich 253 des FĆ¼hrungselements 250 nach vorne hin abgegrenzt. Dieser Mittelbereich 253 ist plattenfƶrmig und horizontal ausgerichtet. Er weist beidseitig je einen Arm 254.1, 254.1 auf, welche von vorne her seitlich nach hinten aussen gerichtet sind. Auf dem Mittelbereich 253 ist die Zwangssteuerung 220 in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar gelagert. Dabei ist sie zwischen dem vorderen Anschlag 252 und der zweiten vertikalen Achse 249 gefĆ¼hrt und entsprechend an einer Bewegung in SkilƤngsrichtung relativ zum FĆ¼hrungselement 250 gehindert.Before the
Wie hier in der Explosionszeichnung ersichtlich, umfasst die Zwangssteuerung 220 zwei Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2, ein Schwenkelement 220.3 und einen Schlitten 220.4. Der Schlitten 220.4 ist zwischen dem FĆ¼hrungselement 250 unten und dem GehƤuse 202 oben sowie vorne und hinten in Skiquerrichtung bewegbar gelagert. Er umfasst eine im Wesentlichen flache, horizontal ausgerichtete, obere FlƤche sowie vorne und hinten je eine im Wesentlichen vertikal in Skiquerrichtung ausgerichtete FlƤche. Daher weist ein vertikaler Querschnitt in SkilƤngsrichtung durch den Schlitten 220.4 eine nach unten offene, oben abgeflachte, n-fƶrmige Form auf. Im montierten Zustand des Frontautomaten 201 ist das Schwenkelement 220.3 von hinten her unter die obere FlƤche des Schlittens 220.4 reichend angeordnet. Dabei ist das Schwenkelement 220.3 in seinem vorderen Bereich durch eine erste vertikale Achse 248 in einer horizontalen Ebene schwenkbar und in SkilƤngsrichtung bewegbar am Schlitten 220.4 gelagert. Um die Schwenkbewegung des Schwenkelements 220.3 zu erleichtern, weist die erste vertikale Achse 248 eine die erste vertikale Achse 248 umlaufende Rolle auf. In Skiquerrichtung gesehen beidseitig des Schwenkelements 220.3 ist je einer der beiden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 unterhalb der oberen FlƤche des Schlittens 220.4 in Skiquerrichtung verschiebbar am Schlitten 220.4 gelagert. ZusƤtzlich sind die beiden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 je durch eine zweite KulissenfĆ¼hrung 221.1, 221.2 im Schwenkelement 220.3 mit einem darin gelagerten, am entsprechenden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 angeordneten, zweiten Kulissenstein 222.1, 222.2 am Schwenkelement 220.3 gelagert. Diese beiden zweiten Kulissensteine 222.1, 222.2 umfassen je eine Rolle, welche den zylinderfƶrmigen Kern des entsprechenden zweiten Kulissensteins 222.1, 222.2 umschliesst. Diese Rollen dienen dazu, dass die zweiten Kulissensteine 222.1, 222.2 mit weniger Reibungsverlusten in der entsprechenden zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrung 221.1, 221.2 bewegt werden kƶnnen.As can be seen here in the exploded view, the
Die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 221.1, 221.2 sind derart angeordnet, dass sie eine Bewegung des Schwenkelements 220.3 in SkilƤngsrichtung relativ zur restlichen Zwangssteuerung 220 und somit den Seitenhebeln 220.1, 220.2 sowie eine Drehbewegung des Schwenkelements 220.3 relativ zur restlichen Zwangssteuerung 220 und somit den Seitenhebeln 220.1, 220.2 erlauben. Bei einer Drehbewegung des Schwenkelements 220.3 werden die beiden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 im gleichen Abstand zueinander gehalten, wƤhrend sie durch eine Relativbewegung in SkilƤngsrichtung auseinandergestossen bzw. zusammengezogen werden. Das Zusammenziehen wird dabei von den beiden Armen 254.1, 254.2 des Mittelbereichs 253 des FĆ¼hrungselements 250 unterstĆ¼tzt, welche ebenfalls mit den zweiten Kulissensteinen 222.1, 222.2 zusammenwirken kƶnnen, wenn das FĆ¼hrungselement 250 nach hinten verschoben wird.The second slide guides 221.1, 221.2 are arranged such that they allow a movement of the pivoting element 220.3 in the longitudinal direction relative to the remaining
An den beiden seitlichen Enden des Schlittens 220.4 ist in einem oberen Bereich je einer der beiden Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 um eine Achse 209.1, 209.2 schwenkbar gelagert. Diese beiden Achsen 209.1, 209.2 sind in einer skiparallelen Ebene angeordnet, wobei zwei Geraden, welche durch die beiden Achsen 209.1, 209.2 definiert sind, beinahe skiparallel ausgerichtet sind und gegen hinten in einem Winkel von etwa 6 Grad aufeinander zu laufen. In einem unteren Bereich unterhalb der Achsen 209.1, 209.3 sind die beiden Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 an Ƥusseren Enden der Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 gelagert. Dazu weisen die beiden Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 an ihren unteren Enden je einen ersten Kulissenstein 224.1, 224.2 auf, welcher jeweils einen zylinderfƶrmigen Querschnitt aufweist und parallel zur Achse 209.1, 209.3 des entsprechend Hebels 205.1, 205.1 ausgerichtet ist. Diese beiden ersten Kulissensteine 224.1, 224.2 sind in der Festhaltestellung sowie in der Freigabestellung jeweils je in einer ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung 223.1, 223.2 des entsprechenden Seitenhebels 220.1, 220.2 gelagert.At the two lateral ends of the slide 220.4, one of the two pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 is pivotably mounted about an axis 209.1, 209.2 in an upper region. These two axes 209.1, 209.2 are arranged in a plane parallel to each other, wherein two straight lines, which are defined by the two axes 209.1, 209.2, are aligned almost in parallel with each other and run towards each other at an angle of approximately 6 degrees. In a lower region below the axes 209.1, 209.3, the two pivoting levers 205.1, 205.2 are mounted on outer ends of the side levers 220.1, 220.2. For this purpose, the two pivot levers 205.1, 205.2 each have at their lower ends a first sliding block 224.1, 224.2, which in each case has a cylindrical cross-section and is aligned parallel to the axis 209.1, 209.3 of the corresponding lever 205.1, 205.1. These two first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 are each stored in the retaining position and in the release position each in a first slotted guide 223.1, 223.2 of the corresponding side lever 220.1, 220.2.
An seiner vorderen, oberen Seitenkante weist der Schlitten 220.4 zwei Einschnitte 227.1, 227.2 auf. In diese beiden Einschnitte 227.1, 227.2 kƶnnen zwei am Steuerhebel 203 angebrachte Riegel 228.1, 228.2 eingreifen. Dadurch kann der Schlitten 220.4 in der Blockierstellung an einer Bewegung in Skiquerrichtung gehindert werden.At its front, upper side edge, the slide 220.4 has two cuts 227.1, 227.2. In this two incisions 227.1, 227.2 can engage two attached to the
Wenn sich der Frontautomat 201 in der Festhaltestellung befindet, kann der Schlitten 220.4 in Skiquerrichtung entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden. Dabei werden auch die beiden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 und die beiden Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 mit dem Schlitten 220.4 mitbewegt. Gleichzeitig wird zudem das Schwenkelement 220.3, welches in seinem vordern Bereich durch der ersten Achse 248 am Schlitten 220.4 und in seinem hinteren Bereich durch die zweite Achse 249 am FĆ¼hrungselement 250 gelagert ist, entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs geschwenkt. Dadurch werden die beiden zweiten Kulissensteine 222.1, 222.2 in den zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 221.1, 221.2 bewegt, wobei die beiden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 in einem gleichen Abstand zueinander gehalten werden.When the front-
Im montierten Zustand des Frontautomaten 201 ist die Spiralfeder 236 zwischen dem Kolben 235 und der Sperrmutter 237 vorgespannt. Nach hinten ist sie Ć¼ber die Sperrmutter 237 und die Stellschraube 238 auf einer Innenseite des GehƤuses 202 abgestĆ¼tzt. Durch Drehen der Stellschraube 238, wodurch die Sperrmutter 237 nach vorne oder hinten bewegt wird, kann dabei die Vorspannung der Spiralfeder 236 eingestellt werden. Entsprechend drĆ¼ckt die Spiralfeder 236 den Kolben 235 mit einer einstellbaren Kraft nach vorne, wo der Kolben 235 gegen das Schwenkelement 220.3 abgestĆ¼tzt ist. Dazu weist der Kolben 235 ein vorderes Ende mit zwei seitlich abgefasten, vertikal ausgerichteten FlƤchen auf, welche in eine v-fƶrmige Einbuchtung im hinteren Ende des Schwenkelements 220.3 passen. Wenn sich der Schlitten 220.4 in einer Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs befindet, so ist das Schwenkelement 220.3 in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtet und der Kolben 235 drĆ¼ckt in die v-fƶrmige Einbuchtung im hinteren Ende des Schwenkelements 220.3. Wenn der Schlitten 220.4 seitlich entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt wird, so wird das Schwenkelement 220.3 wie beschrieben seitlich geschwenkt. Dadurch wird auch die v-fƶrmige Einbuchtung im hinteren Ende des Schwenkelements 220.3 mitgeschwenkt, wobei eine Flanke der v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtung, welche in Bewegungsrichtung der Zwangssteuerung 220 liegt, gegen den Kolben 235 gedrĆ¼ckt wird. Dadurch wird der Kolben 235 nach hinten gedrĆ¼ckt und es wird eine rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft auf das Schwenkelement 220.3 ausgeĆ¼bt, welche das Schwenkelement 220.3 in eine Ausrichtung parallel zur SkilƤngsrichtung und den Schlitten 220.4 in eine mittige Position des Zwangssteuerungswegs zurĆ¼cktreibt. Deshalb kann durch Einstellen der Vorspannung der Spiralfeder 236 die StƤrke der rĆ¼cktreibenden Kraft eingestellt werden.In the mounted state of the front
Die
Weiter ist in den vergrƶsserten Ausschnitten der
Im montierten Zustand sind die zylinderfƶrmigen ersten Kulissensteine 224.1, 224.2 sowohl in der Festhaltestellung als auch in der Freigabestellung in den Haken der ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 223.1, 223.2 gelagert. Gleichzeitig sind auch die AnschlƤge 218.1, 218.2 der Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 gegenĆ¼ber der AnschlƤge 219.1, 219.2 der Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 angeordnet. Entsprechend bewirkt in der Festhaltestellung und in der Freigabestellung eine von der Skimitte her nach aussen wirkende Kraft auf einen der Haltesporne 206.1, 206.2 ein Drehmoment auf die an den Achsen 209.1, 209.2 gelagerten Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2, wodurch die unteren Bereiche der Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 zur Skimitte hin gedrĆ¼ckt werden. Dabei werden die AnschlƤge 218.1, 218.2 der Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 gegen die AnschlƤge 219.1, 219.2 der Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 gedrĆ¼ckt und die Schwenkhebel 205.1, 205.2 kƶnnen durch die Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.1 an einer Schwenkbewegung gehindert werden.In the assembled state, the cylindrical first sliding blocks 224.1, 224.2 are mounted both in the retaining position and in the release position in the hooks of the first sliding guides 223.1, 223.2. At the same time the stops 218.1, 218.2 of the pivot lever 205.1, 205.2 with respect to the stops 219.1, 219.2 of the side lever 220.1, 220.2 are arranged. Correspondingly causes in the arrest position and in the release position, a force acting outward from the ski center on one of the retaining spurs 206.1, 206.2, a torque on the pivoted on the axes 209.1, 209.2 pivot lever 205.1, 205.2, whereby the lower portions of the pivot lever 205.1, 205.2 are pressed towards the ski center. The stops 218.1, 218.2 of the pivot lever 205.1, 205.2 pressed against the stops 219.1, 219.2 of the side lever 220.1, 220.2 and the pivot lever 205.1, 205.2 can be prevented by the side lever 220.1, 220.1 on a pivoting movement.
In
Die
In
Weiter zeigt
Die
Auch in
Die
In
Um den Abstand zwischen den beiden zweiten Kulissensteinen 222.1, 222.2 und damit den Haltespornen 206.1, 206.2 auch wƤhrend einer Bewegung der Zwangssteuerung 220 entlang des Zwangssteuerungswegs und einer damit verbundenen Schwenkbewegung des Schenkelements 220.3 konstant zu halten, laufen die beiden zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 221.1, 221.2 von hinten gegen vorne in gekrĆ¼mmter Form aufeinander zu. Dabei reichen sie beidseitig der ersten vertikalen Achse 248 angeordnet von hinter der ersten vertikalen Achse 248 bis vor die erste vertikale Achse 248. Wenn das Schwenkelement 220.3 wie in
Die
In
Diese Bewegung des Seitenhebels 220.1 und des Schwenkhebels 205.1 wird im Falle einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung durch eine seitwƤrtsgerichtete Kraft angetrieben, welche auf den im Frontautomaten 201 gehaltenen Skischuh wirkt. Das heisst, dass bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung zuerst der im Frontautomaten 201 gehaltene Skischuh in Skiquerrichtung gedrĆ¼ckt wird, wodurch der Schlitten 220.4 bis an ein Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt wird. WƤhrend dieser Bewegung bleibt der Skischuh im Schlitten 220.4 gehalten, wobei durch die Bewegung des Schlittens 220.4 und der Zwangssteuerung 220 gegen die rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft der Spiralfeder 236 Energie aufgenommen wird. Wenn die Energie eines Stosses grƶsser als die derart durch den Frontautomaten 201 aufnehmbare Energie ist, so bewirkt der Skischuh auch am Ende des dynamischen Wegs angelangt noch eine Kraft auf den in Bewegungsrichtung liegenden Schwenkhebel 205.1. Weil der zu diesem Schwenkhebel 205.1 gehƶrende Seitenhebel 220.1 am Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs vom Schwenkelement 220.3 zur Skimitte hin freigegeben ist, kann der Schwenkhebel 205.1 vom Skischuh weiter zur Seite weggedrĆ¼ckt werden. Wenn der der Schwenkhebel 205.1 derart weggedrĆ¼ckt wird, so ist anfangs der Skischuh durch den Haltesporn 206.1 noch in der Lagerbuchse im Skischuh gehalten. Sobald der Schwenkhebel 205.1 aber einen gewissen Schwenkwinkel erreicht hat, beginnt die Steuerbacke 208.1 des Schwenkhebels 205.1 mit der Sohle des Skischuhs zusammenzuwirken, wodurch der Haltesporn 206.1 aus der Lagerbuchse des Skischuhs befreit und der Skischuh entsprechend freigegeben wird.This movement of the side lever 220.1 and the pivot lever 205.1 is driven in the event of a lateral safety release by a sideways directed force which acts on the ski boot held in the
WƤhrend dieser Schwenkbewegung des Schwenkhebels 205.1 wird zudem auch der zweite Kulissenstein 222.1 des Seitenhebels 220.1 in die v-fƶrmige Einbuchtung am vorderen Ende des Schwenkelements 220.3 gedrĆ¼ckt. Dieser Mechanismus hat den Effekt, dass der zweite Kulissenstein 222.1 durch seine Positionierung in der v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtung am vorderen Ende des Schwenkelements 220.3 ein ZurĆ¼ckschnappen des Schwenkelements 220.3 in eine Ausrichtung parallel zur SkilƤngsrichtung verhindert. Entsprechend ist in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung die aus dem Schlitten 220.4, den beiden Seitenhebeln 220.1, 220.2 und dem Schwenkelement 220.3 bestehende Zwangssteuerung 220 blockiert. Trotz dieser Blockierung der Zwangssteuerung 220 ist aber der seitlich weggeschwenkte Schwenkhebel 205.1 frei zwischen einer seitlich weggeschwenkten Stellung und einer beinahe aufgerichteten Stellung schwenkbar.During this pivoting movement of the pivoting lever 205.1, the second sliding block 222.1 of the side lever 220.1 is also pressed into the v-shaped recess at the front end of the pivoting element 220.3. This mechanism has the effect that the second sliding block 222.1 by its positioning in the v-shaped recess at the front end of the pivot member 220.3 prevents snapping back of the pivot member 220.3 in an orientation parallel to the ski longitudinal direction. Accordingly, in the safety release position consisting of the slide 220.4, the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 and the pivot element 220.3 existing forced
Um den Frontautomaten 201 von der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung zurĆ¼ck in die Festhaltestellung zu bringen, reicht es aus, den seitlich weggeschwenkten Schwenkhebel 205.1 aufzurichten. Dadurch wird unterhalb der Achse 209.1 der zylinderfƶrmige, erste Kulissenstein 224.1 nach unten geschwenkt, wo er auf den Haken der entsprechenden ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrung 223.1 trifft und durch ein Zusammenwirken mit diesem Haken den Seitenhebel 220.1 seitwƤrts von der Skimitte wegzieht. Damit wird auch der zweite Kulissenstein 222.1 dieses Seitenhebels 220.1 aus der v-fƶrmigen Einbuchtung am vorderen Ende des Schwenkelements 220.3 herausgezogen, wodurch das Schwenkelement 220.3 freigegeben wird. Sobald das Schwenkelement 220.3 derart freigegeben ist, kann das Schwenkelement 220.3 und die ganze Zwangssteuerung 220 durch die rĆ¼cktreibende Kraft, welche durch die Spiralfeder 236 bewirkt wird, zurĆ¼ck zur Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs bewegt werden.In order to bring the front
Die
In der
Wenn der Frontautomat 201 durch BetƤtigung des Steuerhebels 203 in die Freigabestellung gebracht wird und die beiden Blƶcke 210 nach hinten bewegt werden, drĆ¼cken die Blƶcke 210 nicht nur das FĆ¼hrungselement 250 nach hinten. Sie drĆ¼cken zudem auch in ihrem hinteren, oberen Bereich gegen einen unterhalb der Skiquerachse 207 angeordneten Anschlag 211 am Trittsporn 204, wodurch das freie Ende des Trittsporns 204 nach oben geschwenkt wird. Wenn nun ein Skischuh in den Frontautomaten 201 eingespannt werden soll, so genĆ¼gt es, den Skischuh in SkilƤngsrichtung richtig positioniert auf den Frontautomaten 201 abzusenken. Sobald die Sohle des Skischuhs das freie Ende des Trittsporns 204 nach unten drĆ¼ckt, werden Ć¼ber den Anschlag 211 die Blƶcke 210 nach hinten gedrĆ¼ckt. Dabei reicht der Druck auf die Blƶcke 210 aus, dass sie Ć¼ber die Wƶlbung auf der vorderen Seite des Anschlags 252 des FĆ¼hrungselements 250 bewegt werden, wodurch das FĆ¼hrungselement 250 nach vorne freigegeben wird und durch die Spiralfeder 236 nach vorne bewegt werden kann. Durch diese Bewegung des FĆ¼hrungselements 250 werden Ć¼ber den Anschlag 252 auch die Blƶcke 210 weiter nach vorne bewegt und der Steuerhebel 203 wird in eine Position geschwenkt, in welcher sein freies Ende etwas nach schrƤg vorne oben zeigt. Zudem wird durch die Bewegung des FĆ¼hrungselements 250 auch das Schwenkelement 220.3 nach vorne bewegt, wodurch die beiden Schwenkhebel zusammengeschenkt werden. Entsprechend wird dadurch der Frontautomat 201 in die Festhaltestellung Ć¼berfĆ¼hrt, in welcher der Skischuh in den Haltespornen gehalten wird.When the
Die
Die
Die
Im Gegensatz zu den bisher gezeigten Figuren illustriert die Figurabfolge 24a, 24b und 24c, wie das Schwenkelement 220.3 in der Freigabestellung, der Festhaltestellung, sowie der Blockierstellung in SkilƤngsrichtung positioniert ist. So ist in der
Gleichzeitig wird in der Blockierstellung auch der Schlitten 220 in der Mitte des Zwangssteuerungswegs blockiert. Wie in
Weiter ist in den Querschnittsdarstellungen der
Insbesondere in den Querschnittsdarstellungen wie beispielsweise den
Aus diesen GrĆ¼nden ist der Frontautomat 201 optimiert fĆ¼r eine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung bei einem Tourenskibindungssystem, bei welchem der Fersenautomat keine seitliche Sicherheitsauslƶsung ermƶglicht. So wird der Skischuh bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung um eine Vertikalachse gedreht, bis er aus dem Frontautomat 201 gelƶst ist. Dabei verlƤuft aufgrund der Ausrichtung der Achsen 209.1, 209.2 die Schwenkbewegung des in Bewegungsrichtung liegenden Schwenkhebels 205.1, 205.2 senkrecht zur Bewegungsrichtung des Skischuhs. Entsprechend ist die Ausrichtung der Achsen 209.1, 209.2 fĆ¼r eine Drehbewegung des Skischuhs bei einer seitlichen Sicherheitsauslƶsung optimiert.For these reasons, the front automatic 201 is optimized for lateral safety release in a touring ski binding system in which the automatic heel unit does not allow lateral safety release. Thus, the ski boot is rotated about a vertical axis with a lateral safety release until it is released from the front automatic 201. Due to the orientation of the axes 209.1, 209.2, the pivoting movement of the pivoting lever 205.1, 205.2 located in the direction of movement is perpendicular to the direction of movement of the ski boot. Accordingly, the alignment of the axles 209.1, 209.2 is optimized for a rotational movement of the ski boot in the event of a lateral safety release.
Diese Optimierung hat zudem zur Folge, dass der Schlitten 220.4 gekrĆ¼mmt ist und die beiden Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 der Zwangssteuerung 220 nicht entlang einer rechtwinklig zur SkilƤngsachse verlaufenden Geraden ausgerichtet sind, sondern je rechtwinklig zur entsprechenden Achse 209.1, 209.2 ausgerichtet im Schlitten 220.4 verschiebbar gelagert sind.This optimization also has the consequence that the carriage 220.4 is curved and the two side levers 220.1, 220.2 of the
Der hier gezeigte Frontautomat 301 ist sehr Ƥhnlich wie der Frontautomat 201 konstruiert, welcher in den
Im Gegensatz zum Frontautomaten 201, welcher in den
Weiter umfasst das Schwenkelement 320.3 im Gegensatz zum Schwenkelement 220.3 des Frontautomaten 201 nicht beidseitig je einen Arm. Entsprechend umschliessen die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 321.1, 321.2 am Schwenkelement 320.3 die zweiten Kulissensteine 322.1, 322.2 nicht, sondern stĆ¼tzen die zweiten Kulissensteine 322.1, 322.2 nur gegen eine Bewegung zur Skimitte hin ab. Diese einseitige AbstĆ¼tzung ist auch bei den ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 323.1, 323.2 und den ersten Kulissensteine 324.1, 324.2 gegeben. So umfassen die Seitenhebel 320.1, 320.2 an ihren von der Skimitte abgewanden Seiten zwar je eine erste KulissenfĆ¼hrung 323.1, 323.2. Im Gegensatz zu den ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 223.1, 223.2 der Seitenhebel 220.1, 220.2 des Frontautomaten 201 umfassen die ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 323.1, 323.2 des hier gezeigten Frontautomaten 301 aber keine Haken, sondern einzig je einen Anschlag 319.1, 319.2, gegen welchen die aus einem gegenseitigen Anschlag 318.1, 318.2 bestehenden ersten Kulissensteine 324.1, 324.2 anstehen. Um die ersten Kulissensteine 324.1, 324.2 gegen die ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen 323.1, 323.2 und die zweiten Kulissensteine 322.1, 322.2 gegen die zweiten Kulissensteine 321.1, 321.2 zu drĆ¼cken, umfasst der hier gezeigte Frontautomat 301 zwei Schenkelfedern 329.1, 329.2 (siehe hierzu auch
SelbstverstƤndlich bestehen auch Variationsmƶglichkeiten zu dieser AusfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten 301. So kƶnnen beispielsweise die beiden Schenkelfedern 329.1, 329.2 nur am Schlitten 320.4 und am jeweiligen Schwenkhebel 305.1, 305.2 abgestĆ¼tzt sein. Die beiden Schenkelfedern 329.1, 329.2 kƶnnen aber auch anderswo und andersartig abgestĆ¼tzt sein und kƶnnen auch durch ein andersartiges elastisches Element ersetzt werden, welches eine Zug- oder eine Druckkraft ausĆ¼ben kann. Weiter besteht die Mƶglichkeit, dass je Seite der jeweilige Schwenkhebel 305.1, 305.2 durch ein erstes elastisches Element gegen den entsprechenden Seitenhebel 320.1, 320.2 gedrĆ¼ckt oder gezogen wird, wƤhrend der jeweilige Seitenhebel 320.1, 320.2 durch ein zweites elastisches Element zur Skimitte hin gedrĆ¼ckt wird oder gezogen wird.Of course, there are also variations on this embodiment of the front
In der Explosionszeichnung in
Die
Im vergrƶsserten Ausschnitt der Explosionszeichnung in
Die
Da es sich bei den in den
In einer Variante zum in den
Der in
Ein erster wesentlicher Unterschied zum in den
Ein zweiter wesentlicher Unterschied zwischen dem hier gezeigten Frontautomaten 401 und dem in den
Ein dritter wesentlicher Unterschied zwischen dem hier gezeigten Frontautomaten 401 und den in den
Die
Wenn sich der Frontautomat 401 wie in der
Wenn sich der Frontautomat 401 hingegen wie in der
Im Gegensatz zur
In der
Sowohl in der Freigabestellung, in der Festhaltestellung als auch in der Sicherheitsauslƶsestellung kƶnnen die Schwenkhebel 405.1, 405.2 gegen die Federkraft der Schenkelfedern 429.1, 429.2 mit den Haltespornen zur Skimitte hing geschwenkt werden. Falls daher ein Ski mit dem Frontautomaten 401 umfƤllt und mit einem Schwenkhebel 405.1, 405.2 aufschlƤgt, kann der entsprechende Schwenkhebel 405.1, 405.2 zur Skimitte hin nach innen geschwenkt werden, wodurch die Gefahr einer BeschƤdigung des Frontautomaten 401 reduziert ist.Both in the release position, in the holding position and in the safety release position, the pivot levers 405.1, 405.2 can be pivoted against the spring force of the torsion springs 429.1, 429.2 with the retaining spurs to the center of the ski. Therefore, if a ski with the
In den
In der
Um den Frontautomaten 401 von der Freigabestellung in die Festhaltestellung zu bewegen, kann der Steuerhebel 403 etwas nach oben gezogen werden. Dies genĆ¼gt, um die Rasteinheit 408 von der Rastposition am Kopf 441 des Schwenkelements 420.3 zu lƶsen. Sobald die Rasteinheit 408 von der Rastposition gelƶst ist, wird die Rasteinheit 408 durch die Spiralfeder 436 zusammen mit dem Schwenkelement 420.3 und dem Kolben 435 nach vorne bewegt. Dies fĆ¼hrt dazu, dass der Steuerhebel 403 mit seinem freien Ende nach oben geschwenkt und in die Festhalteposition Ć¼berfĆ¼hrt wird. Als Variante dazu kann zur ĆberfĆ¼hrung des Frontautomaten 401 in die Festhaltestellung aber auch der aus einem Basiselement 404.1 und einem DrahtbĆ¼gel 404.2 bestehende Trittsporn nach unten gedrĆ¼ckt werden. Falls der Trittsporn nach unten gedrĆ¼ckt wird, so wird das Basiselement 404.1 des Trittsporns um die Skiquerachse 407 geschwenkt. Dabei wird der Steuerhebel 403 durch einen Anschlag 410 des Basiselements 404.1, welcher an einem GegenstĆ¼ck des Steuerhebels 403 ansteht, mitbewegt. Dadurch wird ebenfalls die Rasteinheit 408 von der Rastposition am Kopf 441 des Schwenkelements 420.3 gelƶst, wonach der Steuerhebel 403 durch die Spiralfeder 436 in die Festhalteposition und der Frontautomat 401 in die Festhaltestellung bewegt wird.In order to move the front
In der
Da sich die Rasteinheit 408 des Steuerhebels 403 in der Festhaltestellung weiter vorne als in der Freigabestellung befindet, ist vor dem Kopf 441 des Schwenkelements 420.3 durch das nach vorne bewegte hintere Ende der Rasteinheit 408 Platz freigegeben. Dadurch ist das Schwenkelement 420.3 wie bereits im Zusammenhang mit den
Weiter ist in der Festhaltestellung nebst dem Steuerhebel 403 auch das Basiselement 404.1 des Trittsporns um die Skiquerachse 407 geschwenkt, sodass das BĆ¼gelelement 404.2 des Trittsporns auf das GehƤuse 402 des Frontautomaten 401 abgesenkt ist.Next is in the holding position together with the
In der
In einer Variante zum in den
In einer weiteren Variante zum in den
Ein erster wesentlicher Unterschied zwischen dem hier gezeigten Frontautomaten 501 und dem Frontautomaten 401, welcher in den
Funktionsweise des Zusammenspiels der Schwenkhebel 505.1, 505.2 mit dem Schwenkelement 520.3. Wie bereits beim Frontautomaten 401 sind auch hier die beiden Schwenkhebel 505.1, 505.2 in einem mittleren Bereich um im Wesentlichen in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtete Achsen (nicht gezeigt) schwenkbar an einem Schlitten 520.4 gelagert. Unterhalb der Lagerung dieser Achsen an den Schwenkhebeln 505.1, 505.2 umfassen die Schwenkhebel 505.1, 505.2 jedoch keine zur Skimitte zeigenden AnschlƤge, sondern umfassen je einen zur Skimitte zeigenden Schwenkarm 517.1, 517.2. Diese beiden Schwenkarme 517.1, 517.2 weisen je eine lƤngliche Form auf und sind je im Bereich eines unteren Endes des entsprechenden Schwenkhebels 505.1, 505.2 um eine im Wesentlichen in SkilƤngsrichtung ausgerichtete Achse (nicht gezeigt) schwenkbar am entsprechenden Schwenkhebel 505.1, 505.2 gelagert. Im montierten Zustand des Frontautomaten 501 zeigen diese beiden Schwenkarme 517.1, 517.2 im Wesentlichen horizontal zur Skimitte und wirken mit einem freien Ende, welches der Lagerung am jeweiligen Schwenkhebel 505.1, 505.2 gegenĆ¼berliegt, mit dem Schwenkelement 520.3 zusammen. Wenn daher ein Schwenkarm 517.1, 517.2 durch das Schwenkelement 520.3 von der Skimitte weg nach aussen gedrĆ¼ckt wird, so wird der entsprechende Schwenkhebel 505.1, 505.2 mit dem entsprechenden Haltesporn 506.1, 506.2 zur Skimitte hin geschwenkt. Wenn das Schwenkelement 520.3 hingegen einem Schwenkarm 517.1, 517.2 mehr Platz zur Skimitte hin gewƤhrt, so wird der entsprechende Schwenkhebel 505.1, 505.2 durch eine hier nicht gezeigte Schenkelfeder nach aussen geschwenkt, sodass der entsprechende Haltesporn 506.1, 506.2 von der Skimitte weg nach aussen und der entsprechende Schwenkarm 517.1, 517.2 nach innen zur Skimitte hin bewegt wird.Function of the interaction of the swivel levers 505.1, 505.2 with the swivel element 520.3. As in the case of the front
Ein zweiter wesentlicher Unterschied zwischen dem hier gezeigten Frontautomaten 501 und dem Frontautomaten 401, welcher in den
In einer Variante zum in der
SelbstverstƤndlich beschrƤnkt sich die Erfindung nicht auf die oben beschriebenen AusfĆ¼hrungsbeispiele des Frontautomaten 1 und der vier weiteren Frontautomaten 201, 301, 401 und 501. Es sind diverse weitere AusfĆ¼hrungen mƶglich. So kƶnnen beispielsweise Merkmale der Frontautomaten 1, 201, 301, 401 und 501 beliebig kombiniert werden. So kƶnnen beispielsweise die Frontautomaten 401, 501 anstelle der DƤmpferstellung auch eine Blockierstellung oder weder eine DƤmpferstellung noch eine Blockierstellung aufweisen. Genauso kƶnnen auch die Frontautomaten 1, 201 und 301 anstelle der Blockierstellung eine DƤmpferstellung oder weder eine DƤmpferstellung noch eine Blockierstellung aufweisen.Of course, the invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments of the front automatic 1 and the four other
UnabhƤngig von solchen Kombinationen kƶnnen beispielsweise sowohl die ersten als auch die zweiten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen durch andere FĆ¼hrungen ersetzt werden. Eine Mƶglichkeit dazu ist, dass SchwalbenschwanzfĆ¼hrungen mit einem darauf gefĆ¼hrten Schlitten eingesetzt werden. Weiter kƶnnen auch die ersten KulissenfĆ¼hrungen nicht an der Zwangssteuerung, sondern am GehƤuse des Frontautomaten angeordnet sein. Im Fall des Frontautomaten 1 kƶnnen dabei die beiden Achsen an der Zwangssteuerung anstelle des GehƤuses angeordnet sein. Weiter kann im Fall des Frontautomaten 1 auch die Lagerung der beiden Schwenkhebel an der Zwangssteuerung unterhalb der Achsen angeordnet sein, um welche die Schwenkhebel schwenkbar sind.Regardless of such combinations, for example, both the first and the second slide guides can be replaced by other guides. One way to do this is to use dovetail guides with a carriage guided thereon. Next, the first slide guides can not be arranged on the positive control, but on the housing of the front automata. In the case of the front
Im Fall der weiteren Frontautomaten 201, 301, 401 und 501 hingegen kann beispielweise das Wegschwenken des in Bewegungsrichtung liegenden Schwenkhebels dadurch erreicht werden, dass am GehƤuse des Frontautomaten eine FĆ¼hrung fĆ¼r die Schwenkhebel angeordnet ist, welche den entsprechenden Schwenkhebel freigibt, sobald das Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs erreicht ist. Es ist aber auch denkbar, dass die Zwangssteuerung am Ende des Zwangssteuerungswegs an ein Hindernis anstƶsst, wodurch ein Freigabemechanismus an der Zwangssteuerung betƤtigt wird, welcher den entsprechenden Hebel fĆ¼r eine Schwenkbewegung freigibt.In the case of the other
Die Erfindung beschrƤnkt sich nicht auf diese Varianten des Frontautomaten. Es sind auch weitere AusfĆ¼hrungsformen mƶglich.The invention is not limited to these variants of the front automate. There are also other embodiments possible.
Zusammenfassend ist festzustellen, dass ein Frontautomat geschaffen wird, welcher die Sicherheit fĆ¼r einen SkilƤufer erhƶht.In summary, it should be noted that a front automatic is created, which increases the safety for a skier.
Claims (15)
gekennzeichnet durch
marked by
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
EP20192634.2A EP3766550A1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-09-19 | Front device |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CH16052011A CH705586A2 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2011-09-29 | Front machine for ski binding e.g. touring, has levers that are mounted by positive control in retaining position, so that levers are coupled within dynamic range and can be moved in transverse direction |
CH00250/12A CH705579A2 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-02-27 | Front machine. |
Related Child Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP20192634.2A Division EP3766550A1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-09-19 | Front device |
EP20192634.2A Division-Into EP3766550A1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-09-19 | Front device |
Publications (3)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
EP2574379A2 true EP2574379A2 (en) | 2013-04-03 |
EP2574379A3 EP2574379A3 (en) | 2014-12-31 |
EP2574379B1 EP2574379B1 (en) | 2020-09-30 |
Family
ID=46980873
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP12405102.0A Active EP2574379B1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-09-19 | Front device |
EP20192634.2A Pending EP3766550A1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-09-19 | Front device |
Family Applications After (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP20192634.2A Pending EP3766550A1 (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2012-09-19 | Front device |
Country Status (3)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US9526973B2 (en) |
EP (2) | EP2574379B1 (en) |
CH (1) | CH705579A2 (en) |
Cited By (11)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP2813268A1 (en) | 2013-06-12 | 2014-12-17 | Fritschi AG - Swiss Bindings | Front automat |
DE102013220722A1 (en) * | 2013-10-14 | 2015-04-16 | Salewa Sport Ag | Gleitbrettbindung |
EP2929920A1 (en) * | 2014-04-09 | 2015-10-14 | Salomon S.A.S. | Ski binding |
FR3019755A1 (en) * | 2014-04-09 | 2015-10-16 | Salomon Sas | SKI FIXING |
EP2965791A1 (en) | 2014-07-08 | 2016-01-13 | Fritschi AG - Swiss Bindings | Front pin ski binding boot positioning unit |
AT513964A3 (en) * | 2013-01-15 | 2019-10-15 | Rossignol Sa | ski binding |
EP3566754A1 (en) | 2018-05-08 | 2019-11-13 | Fritschi AG - Swiss Bindings | Front skibinding |
EP3851174A1 (en) | 2020-01-16 | 2021-07-21 | Fritschi AG - Swiss Bindings | Front unit for a ski binding |
EP3878528A1 (en) * | 2020-03-13 | 2021-09-15 | Salewa Sport AG | Front unit for a ski binding with a step-in aid |
EP3928842A1 (en) * | 2020-06-22 | 2021-12-29 | Salewa Sport AG | Front unit for a touring ski binding |
WO2022149986A1 (en) * | 2021-01-08 | 2022-07-14 | Rottefella As | A release mechanism for a ski binding |
Families Citing this family (9)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2009121187A1 (en) | 2008-04-03 | 2009-10-08 | G3 Genuine Guide Gear Inc. | Toe unit for alpine touring binding |
ITTO20110598A1 (en) * | 2011-07-07 | 2013-01-08 | Elmi S R L | TIP FOR SKI CONNECTION OR SNOWSHOES WITH MAGNETIC SELF-CENTERING SYSTEM |
DE102012206880A1 (en) | 2012-04-25 | 2013-10-31 | Salewa Sport Ag | Front unit for a board binding, in particular pivotable front unit with release arrangement |
ITBO20120645A1 (en) * | 2012-11-28 | 2014-05-29 | Atk Race Srl | DEVICE FOR THE REMOVABLE LOCKING OF THE CENTRAL-FRONT PART OF A SKIING BOOT AT THE SKI TABLE TO IMPLEMENT THE TELEMARK TECHNIQUE |
FR3002460B1 (en) * | 2013-02-22 | 2017-08-25 | Rossignol Sa | TORSIONALLY AUTOMATIC TRIGGER STOP |
US9242167B2 (en) | 2013-07-09 | 2016-01-26 | G3 Genuine Guide Gear Inc. | Ski binding heel unit |
IT201800009744A1 (en) * | 2018-10-24 | 2020-04-24 | Atk Race Srl | SKI ATTACHMENT TOE |
IT202000012502A1 (en) * | 2020-05-27 | 2021-11-27 | Atk Sports S R L | FRONT INSERT FOR SKI MOUNTAINEERING BOOTS, FOR ATTACHING THE BOOT TO A SKI MOUNTAINEERING BINDING |
IT202100018380A1 (en) * | 2021-07-13 | 2023-01-13 | Atk Sports S R L | SKI BINDING TOE FOR SKI MOUNTAINEERING |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP0199098A2 (en) | 1985-03-25 | 1986-10-29 | Fritz Dipl.-Ing. Barthel | Cross-country ski binding |
EP0754079B1 (en) | 1995-02-01 | 1999-04-28 | Fritschi Ag, Apparatebau | Ski binding |
WO2007010392A2 (en) | 2005-07-22 | 2007-01-25 | Ski Trab S.R.L. | Toe-piece for ski bindings |
WO2009121187A1 (en) | 2008-04-03 | 2009-10-08 | G3 Genuine Guide Gear Inc. | Toe unit for alpine touring binding |
Family Cites Families (22)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
AT359892B (en) * | 1976-05-15 | 1980-12-10 | Wunder Kg Heinrich | SKI BINDING WITH A SECURITY RELEASE PART |
DE2706111A1 (en) | 1977-02-14 | 1978-08-17 | Werner Froer | Safety ski binding for cross country run - has two hinged toe clamp levers forming shoe holding stirrup engaging counter-bearing in shoe |
US4184696A (en) * | 1978-07-17 | 1980-01-22 | Settembre Richard J | Safety binding for touring skis |
US4348036A (en) * | 1980-08-19 | 1982-09-07 | Settembre Richard J | Safety binding for nordic skis |
DE3437725C2 (en) * | 1984-02-22 | 1986-04-03 | Heinrich Wunder GmbH & Co KG, 8060 Dachau | Front sole retention device |
US4913456A (en) * | 1986-06-05 | 1990-04-03 | Marker Deutschland Gmbh | Front-piece for a safety ski-binding |
CH673402A5 (en) * | 1987-12-23 | 1990-03-15 | Marker Deutschland Gmbh | Ski-binding front jaw unit - has jaws extended beyond attachment points and detachably locked by stop |
FR2632537B1 (en) * | 1988-06-08 | 1991-12-06 | Salomon Sa | SECURITY FIXING FOR SKI |
DE4007667C1 (en) * | 1990-03-10 | 1991-06-20 | Silvretta - Sherpas Sportartikel Gmbh & Co Kg, 8047 Karlsfeld, De | |
US6105994A (en) * | 1997-04-09 | 2000-08-22 | Parris; James E. | Step-in binding having safety release mechanism for Telemark ski |
DE19727159A1 (en) | 1997-06-26 | 1999-01-07 | Marker Deutschland Gmbh | Releasable ski binding between boot toe and ski |
FR2786706B1 (en) * | 1998-12-08 | 2001-02-09 | Look Fixations Sa | SKI BINDING |
FR2843701B1 (en) | 2002-08-22 | 2004-11-05 | Look Fixations Sa | FRONT MOUNTING FOR SLIDING SPORTS EQUIPMENT |
DE102010029647A1 (en) * | 2010-06-02 | 2011-12-08 | Salewa Sport Ag | touring binding |
NO20101289A1 (en) * | 2010-09-15 | 2012-03-16 | Rottefella As | Cross-country bonding, as well as a method for assembling said cross-country bonding |
ITTO20110598A1 (en) * | 2011-07-07 | 2013-01-08 | Elmi S R L | TIP FOR SKI CONNECTION OR SNOWSHOES WITH MAGNETIC SELF-CENTERING SYSTEM |
DE202011109616U1 (en) | 2011-12-28 | 2012-02-06 | Sepp Heumann | Safety binding system |
DE102012201816B4 (en) | 2012-02-07 | 2022-10-20 | Fritz Barthel | Front unit for a gliding board binding having first and second engagement means |
DE102012201812B4 (en) | 2012-02-07 | 2016-10-13 | Fritz Barthel | Front unit for a sliding board binding, touring binding and ski jumping binding |
DE102012209339B4 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2018-03-15 | Marker Deutschland Gmbh | Shoe-holding unit with damping |
ITBO20120645A1 (en) * | 2012-11-28 | 2014-05-29 | Atk Race Srl | DEVICE FOR THE REMOVABLE LOCKING OF THE CENTRAL-FRONT PART OF A SKIING BOOT AT THE SKI TABLE TO IMPLEMENT THE TELEMARK TECHNIQUE |
EP2929920A1 (en) * | 2014-04-09 | 2015-10-14 | Salomon S.A.S. | Ski binding |
-
2012
- 2012-02-27 CH CH00250/12A patent/CH705579A2/en unknown
- 2012-09-19 US US13/622,861 patent/US9526973B2/en active Active
- 2012-09-19 EP EP12405102.0A patent/EP2574379B1/en active Active
- 2012-09-19 EP EP20192634.2A patent/EP3766550A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP0199098A2 (en) | 1985-03-25 | 1986-10-29 | Fritz Dipl.-Ing. Barthel | Cross-country ski binding |
EP0754079B1 (en) | 1995-02-01 | 1999-04-28 | Fritschi Ag, Apparatebau | Ski binding |
WO2007010392A2 (en) | 2005-07-22 | 2007-01-25 | Ski Trab S.R.L. | Toe-piece for ski bindings |
WO2009121187A1 (en) | 2008-04-03 | 2009-10-08 | G3 Genuine Guide Gear Inc. | Toe unit for alpine touring binding |
Cited By (14)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
AT513964A3 (en) * | 2013-01-15 | 2019-10-15 | Rossignol Sa | ski binding |
EP2813268A1 (en) | 2013-06-12 | 2014-12-17 | Fritschi AG - Swiss Bindings | Front automat |
DE102013220722A1 (en) * | 2013-10-14 | 2015-04-16 | Salewa Sport Ag | Gleitbrettbindung |
US9795862B2 (en) | 2014-04-09 | 2017-10-24 | Salomon S.A.S. | Ski binding |
US9220969B2 (en) | 2014-04-09 | 2015-12-29 | Salomon S.A.S. | Ski binding |
FR3019755A1 (en) * | 2014-04-09 | 2015-10-16 | Salomon Sas | SKI FIXING |
EP2929920A1 (en) * | 2014-04-09 | 2015-10-14 | Salomon S.A.S. | Ski binding |
EP2965791A1 (en) | 2014-07-08 | 2016-01-13 | Fritschi AG - Swiss Bindings | Front pin ski binding boot positioning unit |
EP3566754A1 (en) | 2018-05-08 | 2019-11-13 | Fritschi AG - Swiss Bindings | Front skibinding |
US11338192B2 (en) | 2018-05-08 | 2022-05-24 | Fritschi AGāSwiss Bindings | Automatic front unit for a ski binding |
EP3851174A1 (en) | 2020-01-16 | 2021-07-21 | Fritschi AG - Swiss Bindings | Front unit for a ski binding |
EP3878528A1 (en) * | 2020-03-13 | 2021-09-15 | Salewa Sport AG | Front unit for a ski binding with a step-in aid |
EP3928842A1 (en) * | 2020-06-22 | 2021-12-29 | Salewa Sport AG | Front unit for a touring ski binding |
WO2022149986A1 (en) * | 2021-01-08 | 2022-07-14 | Rottefella As | A release mechanism for a ski binding |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US20130087992A1 (en) | 2013-04-11 |
US9526973B2 (en) | 2016-12-27 |
EP2574379A3 (en) | 2014-12-31 |
EP3766550A1 (en) | 2021-01-20 |
EP2574379B1 (en) | 2020-09-30 |
CH705579A2 (en) | 2013-04-15 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
EP2574379B1 (en) | Front device | |
EP2608853B1 (en) | Rear binding for touring with dynamic sliding range | |
EP2659939B1 (en) | Heel unit for a ski touring binding | |
EP3566754B1 (en) | Front skibinding | |
EP3498345B1 (en) | Lightweight ski binding with increased release security | |
EP2570160B1 (en) | Heel unit for a touring binding | |
EP2705883B1 (en) | Automatic heel device for a ski binding | |
EP3702005A1 (en) | Heelholder | |
EP2813268A1 (en) | Front automat | |
EP3195906B1 (en) | Heel device with walk configuration | |
EP3345659B1 (en) | Automated heelholder device for a ski binding | |
DE1428855A1 (en) | Safety ski binding with a swivel plate with side jaws in the front | |
EP3120903B1 (en) | Heel unit | |
DE3120090A1 (en) | SAFETY SKI BINDING | |
CH706664B1 (en) | Ski binding. | |
EP3053632A1 (en) | Automatic heel mechanism | |
EP3332843B1 (en) | Heel unit for a gliding board binding with a brake assembly | |
EP3167943B1 (en) | Heel device with heel support structure | |
DE102013224574B4 (en) | Heel unit for a touring binding and touring binding | |
CH705586A2 (en) | Front machine for ski binding e.g. touring, has levers that are mounted by positive control in retaining position, so that levers are coupled within dynamic range and can be moved in transverse direction | |
EP3851174A1 (en) | Front unit for a ski binding | |
DE2701842A1 (en) | SKI BINDING WITH A MOVABLE PLATE TO ADD THE APPROPRIATE BOOT | |
DE202010010115U1 (en) | Mechanics for an office chair | |
EP3103525B1 (en) | Heel binding | |
DE2621758C3 (en) | Safety release part for ski bindings |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
PUAI | Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012 |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: A2 Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
AX | Request for extension of the european patent |
Extension state: BA ME |
|
PUAL | Search report despatched |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009013 |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: A3 Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
AX | Request for extension of the european patent |
Extension state: BA ME |
|
RIC1 | Information provided on ipc code assigned before grant |
Ipc: A63C 9/085 20120101ALI20141121BHEP Ipc: A63C 9/086 20120101AFI20141121BHEP |
|
17P | Request for examination filed |
Effective date: 20150612 |
|
RBV | Designated contracting states (corrected) |
Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
17Q | First examination report despatched |
Effective date: 20160408 |
|
TPAC | Observations filed by third parties |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNTIPA |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: EXAMINATION IS IN PROGRESS |
|
GRAP | Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: GRANT OF PATENT IS INTENDED |
|
INTG | Intention to grant announced |
Effective date: 20180517 |
|
GRAJ | Information related to disapproval of communication of intention to grant by the applicant or resumption of examination proceedings by the epo deleted |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSDIGR1 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: EXAMINATION IS IN PROGRESS |
|
INTC | Intention to grant announced (deleted) | ||
GRAP | Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: GRANT OF PATENT IS INTENDED |
|
INTG | Intention to grant announced |
Effective date: 20190626 |
|
GRAJ | Information related to disapproval of communication of intention to grant by the applicant or resumption of examination proceedings by the epo deleted |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSDIGR1 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: EXAMINATION IS IN PROGRESS |
|
GRAP | Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: GRANT OF PATENT IS INTENDED |
|
INTC | Intention to grant announced (deleted) | ||
INTG | Intention to grant announced |
Effective date: 20191211 |
|
GRAJ | Information related to disapproval of communication of intention to grant by the applicant or resumption of examination proceedings by the epo deleted |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSDIGR1 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: EXAMINATION IS IN PROGRESS |
|
GRAP | Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: GRANT OF PATENT IS INTENDED |
|
INTC | Intention to grant announced (deleted) | ||
INTG | Intention to grant announced |
Effective date: 20200507 |
|
GRAS | Grant fee paid |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR3 |
|
GRAA | (expected) grant |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009210 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: THE PATENT HAS BEEN GRANTED |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: B1 Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: CH Ref legal event code: EP Ref country code: GB Ref legal event code: FG4D Free format text: NOT ENGLISH |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: CH Ref legal event code: NV Representative=s name: KELLER SCHNEIDER PATENT- UND MARKENANWAELTE AG, CH Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R096 Ref document number: 502012016384 Country of ref document: DE Ref country code: AT Ref legal event code: REF Ref document number: 1318202 Country of ref document: AT Kind code of ref document: T Effective date: 20201015 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: IE Ref legal event code: FG4D Free format text: LANGUAGE OF EP DOCUMENT: GERMAN |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: GR Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20201231 Ref country code: FI Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 Ref country code: SE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 Ref country code: NO Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20201230 Ref country code: HR Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 Ref country code: BG Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20201230 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: LV Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 Ref country code: RS Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: NL Ref legal event code: MP Effective date: 20200930 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: LT Ref legal event code: MG4D |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: RO Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 Ref country code: SM Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 Ref country code: NL Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 Ref country code: LT Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 Ref country code: PT Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20210201 Ref country code: CZ Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 Ref country code: EE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: AL Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 Ref country code: ES Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 Ref country code: IS Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20210130 Ref country code: PL Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: SK Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R097 Ref document number: 502012016384 Country of ref document: DE |
|
PLBE | No opposition filed within time limit |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009261 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: NO OPPOSITION FILED WITHIN TIME LIMIT |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: DK Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 |
|
26N | No opposition filed |
Effective date: 20210701 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: SI Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: BE Ref legal event code: MM Effective date: 20210930 |
|
GBPC | Gb: european patent ceased through non-payment of renewal fee |
Effective date: 20210919 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: IS Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20210130 Ref country code: MC Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: LU Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20210919 Ref country code: IE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20210919 Ref country code: GB Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20210919 Ref country code: BE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20210930 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: HU Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT; INVALID AB INITIO Effective date: 20120919 Ref country code: CY Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: AT Payment date: 20230921 Year of fee payment: 12 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: FR Payment date: 20230928 Year of fee payment: 12 Ref country code: DE Payment date: 20230823 Year of fee payment: 12 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: IT Payment date: 20230927 Year of fee payment: 12 Ref country code: CH Payment date: 20231001 Year of fee payment: 12 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: MK Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20200930 |